O w n e r’s Ma n u a l
201a
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE UNIT SAFELY”
(p. 3) and “IMPORTANT NOTES” (p. 5). These sections provide important information
concerning the proper operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you
have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, Owner’s manual
should be read in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a
convenient reference.
202
Copyright © 2002 ROLAND CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without
the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USIN G THE UN IT SAFELY
The
symbol alerts the user to important instructions
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
The
symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
001
008e
•
Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
•
Use only the attached power-supply cord.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
009
002c
•
Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
•
Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its
AC adaptor.
..........................................................................................................
003
•
Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
..........................................................................................................
010
•
This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
..........................................................................................................
004
•
Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
..........................................................................................................
011
•
Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,
coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
..........................................................................................................
012b
•
Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC
adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page when:
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
..........................................................................................................
007
•
Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
• The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord, or the
plug has been damaged; or
..........................................................................................................
008c
•
Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with
the unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the
installation matches the input voltage specified on
the AC adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may
use a different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
013
107c
•
In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
•
Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108d: Selection
•
..........................................................................................................
014
•
If you need to move the instrument, take note of
the precautions listed below. At least two persons
are required to safely lift and move the unit. It
should be handled carefully, all the while keeping
it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect
yourself from injury and the instrument from
damage.
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
015
•
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
1
• Check to make sure the knob bolts securing the
unit to the stand have not become loose. Fasten
them again securely whenever you notice any
loosening.
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/ amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
2
3
• Disconnect the power cord.
..........................................................................................................
• Disconnect all cords coming from external
devices.
016
•
Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” page.
6
• Remove the music stand.
..........................................................................................................
109b
..........................................................................................................
•
Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
026
•
Do not put anything that contains water (e.g.,
flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of
insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray
cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any
liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth.
..........................................................................................................
110b
•
Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the
outlet.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
118
•
Should you remove the screws fastening the music
rest, make sure to put them in a safe place out of
children’s reach, so there is no chance of them
being swallowed accidentally.
101b
•
The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so
their location or position does not interfere with
their proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................
102c
•
Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
103b
•
At regular intervals, you should unplug the AC
adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe
all dust and other accumulations away from its
prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug and
the power outlet can result in poor insulation and
lead to fire.
..........................................................................................................
104
•
Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
•
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPO RTAN T N O TES
291a
355b
•
Po w e r Su p p ly
301
Any accumulation of dust between the AC adaptor and
the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to
fire. Periodically wipe away such dust with a dry cloth.
Also, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet
whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended
period of time.
•
Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any
device that will generate line noise (such as an electric
motor or variable lighting system).
302
•
The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long
hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a
cause for concern.
356
•
Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain
on the unit for long periods of time. Such objects can
discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish.
307
•
Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/ or damage to speakers or other devices.
358
•
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard.
This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing
to produce sound.
308
•
Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the
POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the
unit has been completely disconnected from the source of
power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first
turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord
from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into
which you choose to connect the power cord’s plug
should be one that is within easy reach.
359
•
Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument.
Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the
exterior finish.
Ma in te n a n ce
401b
•
To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is
slightly dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an
equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with the
grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area can
damage the finish.
Pla ce m e n t
351
•
Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum.
To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this
unit; or move it farther away from the source of inter-
ference.
402
•
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/ or
deformation.
352a
•
This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s
551
352b
•
•
Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the
improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against
the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that
you periodically save a backup copy of important data
you have stored in the unit’s memory on a floppy disk.
Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-
ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
552
•
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored on a floppy disk once it has been
lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning
such loss of data.
353
•
Observe the following when using the unit’s floppy disk
drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using Floppy
553
•
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a
strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
554
•
556
•
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while
the drive is operating.
When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
354b
•
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are used
while their light source is very close to the unit (such as a
piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the
same area of the unit for extended periods of time.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
558a
•
To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
559a
Ha n d lin g Flo p p y Disk s
•
When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
651
•
Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of
magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is
required to enable storage of large amounts of data on
such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity,
please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
560
•
Do not apply undue force to the music stand while it is in
use.
561
•
Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold
separately). By connecting any other expression pedals,
you risk causing malfunction and/ or damage to the unit.
• Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk.
• Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas.
562
• Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes
(e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recom-
mended temperature range: 10 to 50° C (50 to 122° F).
•
Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
• Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields,
such as those generated by loudspeakers.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
652
•
Floppy disks have a “write protect” tab which can protect
the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that
the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to
the WRITE position only when you wish to write new
data onto the disk.
Be fo re Usin g Flo p p y Disk s
Rear side of the disk
Ha n d lin g th e Flo p p y Disk Drive
602
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
•
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from
vibration.
603
•
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved
to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly
different than its former location. Rapid changes in the
environment can cause condensation to form inside the
drive, which will adversely affect the operation of the
drive and/ or damage floppy disks. When the unit has
been moved, allow it to become accustomed to the new
environment (allow a few hours) before operating it.
Write Protect Tab
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
653
•
The identification label should be firmly affixed to the
disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the
drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk.
654
•
Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and
to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By
using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the
disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction.
604
•
To insert a disk, push it gently but firmly into the drive—
it will click into place. To remove a disk, press the EJECT
button firmly. Do not use excessive force to remove a disk
which is lodged in the drive.
655
•
Disks containing performance data for this unit should
always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the
“Protect” position) before you insert them into the drive
on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the
HP-G, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a computer’s
drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab remains in the
“Write” position), when you perform any disk operations
using the other device’s disk drive (such as checking the
contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk rendering
the disk unreadable by this unit’s disk drive.
605a
•
Never eject a disk while reading or writing is in progress,
since that can damage the magnetic surface of the disk,
rendering it unusable. (The disk drive’s indicator will
light up at full brightness when the drive is busy reading
or writing data. Ordinarily, the indicator will be less
brightly lit, or be extinguished.)
606
•
Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or
down.
607
•
To prevent damage to the disk drive’s heads, always try to
hold the floppy disk in a level position (not tilted in any
direction) while inserting it into the drive. Push it in
firmly, but gently. Never use excessive force.
203
* GS (
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo-
608
•
To avoid the risk of malfunction and/ or damage, insert
only floppy disks into the disk drive. Never insert any
other type of disk. Avoid getting paper clips, coins, or any
other foreign objects inside the drive.
ration.
???
* XGlite (
ration.
207
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
210
* IBM and IBM PC are registered trademark of International
Business Machines Corporation.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In tro d u ctio n
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KF-7 Intelligent Piano.
While the KF-7 Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano
performances, it also features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous
other useful functions. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for
many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety.
Ma in Fe a tu re s
● Pia n o So u n d s w ith Rich Re so n a n ce a n d W id e -Ra n g in g
Ex p re ssive n e ss
The stereo sampling piano sound generator realistically reproduces even the sound of
the hammers striking the strings, producing the tones of a high-quality concert grand
piano.
Maximum polyphony of 128 notes ensures that you can use the pedal freely without
running out of notes.
Moreover, since the included pedal (DP-8) allows use of half-damper techniques, you
can enjoy piano performances that are even richer and more expressive.
● Pu rsu in g th e Pla y in g Fe e l o f a Gra n d Pia n o
These instruments feature a progressive hammer action keyboard, which duplicates the
touch of a grand piano, with a heavier touch in the lower register, and a lighter touch in
the upper register.
● Ge t Ea sy Re su lts w ith th e Ma in Bu tto n s
You can play songs, display scores, play the Automatic Accompaniment, select Tones,
and perform other main KF-7 functions easily by pressing the main buttons found on
both sides of the screen.
With the [Select/Listen to a Song] button, you can select over 170 internal songs, from
songs for piano practice to the latest hits. Pressing the [Score Display] button lets you
display not only the score for any of the internal songs, but for your own recorded songs
and songs on floppy disks.
With the [Music Assistant] button you can select a song you want to play, call up
Automatic Accompaniment settings that match that song, and while looking at the
chord score, perform with accompaniment added.
Thanks to the [Select Various Tones] button, which is used to select suggested Tones
from the more than 600 internal Tones; the [Song Stylist] button, which allows you to
listen to a variety of arrangements of the internal popular songs, and transform them
into rock, jazz, or other forms of music; and the [Session Partner] button, which lets
you leave the chords and rhythm to the backing band, and give your performances the
feel of a group session, you can enjoy playing the KF-7 in a great variety of creative ways.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In tro d u ctio n
● A Va rie ty o f Su p p o rt Fu n ctio n s fo r Fo ste rin g Rich Mu sica l
Ab ilitie s
In addition to score displays that let you see note names and fingerings, and a bouncing
ball that keeps track of the notes currently being played, you can also enjoy other
powerful practice functions, like repeated practice of a specified segment, and simple
playback and recording of each hand’s part–features that only a digital piano can
provide.
Other useful practice features include a “Replay” pedal that you can press to stop the
performance and go back when you have trouble with what you’re playing, and “Touch
the Note,” a function that lets you confirm how a note sounds by touching the note on
the screen.
Features geared specifically for young children include “Wonderland,” where kids can
enjoy touching a variety of instruments; and the “Game,” an ear-training feature which
helps build their listening abilities with all the fun of a game.
● “ Rh y th m Pa rtn e r” Pro vid e s N a tu ra l-So u n d in g Te m p o
Along with a wide variety of metronome functions that allow you to change the tone and
note divisions (patterns), the KF-7 also includes built-in rhythm functions. Now you can
perform with a natural tempo that matches the rhythm.
● Re fin e d a n d Sim p le De sig n
From the tasteful brown tones to real wood used for the sides, this instrument has a look
to fit in naturally with your room’s interior design.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In tro d u ctio n
Ho w To Use Th is Ma n u a l
The KF-7 Owner’s Manual consists of two volumes, Quick Start and the Owner’s
Manual.
(this volume). This explains how to connect the KF-7’s power cord and how to turn on
the instrument’s power.
After turning on the KF-7’s power, please continue by reading Quick Start.
By trying out the various procedures while reading the Quick Start, you can easily learn
how to play the KF-7 and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that
involve use of the “main buttons”).
The Owner’s Manual describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for
special applications (for example, using the KF-7 as an accompanist and creating songs),
that will help you master the KF-7’s many performance functions.
● Co n ve n tio n s Use d in Th is Ma n u a l
This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise
instructions.
• Button names are enclosed in square brackets “[ ]”, as in One Touch Program [Piano]
button.
• On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets “< >”, as in <Exit>.
• The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called “touching.”
N O TE
• An asterisk (*) or a
at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or
precaution. These should not be ignored.
• (p. **) refers to pages within the manual.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
Fro n t Pa n e l
3
4 7 8
9
10 11 12
14
1 8 19 20
1
2
5
6
13
15
16 17
21
22
1 . [Vo lu m e ] k n o b
Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa d s
1 3 . [1 ]–[4 ]
The operation of each is changed depending on the buttons
2 . [Brillia n ce ] k n o b
numbered 1 1 –1 3 .
3 . [W o n d e rla n d / Ga m e ] b u tto n
1 4 . Mu sic Sty le b u tto n s
Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.
Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that you’ve made
→ See the Quick Start
Ba la n ce
1 5 . Fill In b u tto n s
Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes the
4 . [Pa rt Ba la n ce ] b u tto n
This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the
[To Variation] button
[To Original] button
5 . [Ba la n ce ] k n o b
Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the
1 6 . [In tro / En d in g ] b u tto n
6 . [Use r Pro g ra m ] b u tto n
1 7 . [Sta rt/ Sto p ] b u tto n
DSP
Rh y th m Pa rtn e r
7 . [Re ve rb ] b u tto n
1 8 . [Me tro n o m e ] b u tto n
8 . [Ad va n ce d 3 D] b u tto n
Adds three-dimensional breadth to the accompaniment sounds
1 9 . Be a t In d ica to r
This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected
song or accompaniment.
9 . [Eq u a lize r] b u tto n
2 0 . [Rh y th m ] b u tto n
1 0 . [Sty le O rch e stra to r] b u tto n
2 1 . Te m p o [-] [+] b u tto n s
Adjusts the tempo.
This is used to change the arrangement type for automatic
Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to the
original tempo.
1 1 . [Ph ra se ] Bu tto n
This is used to play a short phrase with the Performance Pads
1 2 . [Use r Fu n ctio n ] Bu tto n
This is used to assign a variety of functions to the Performance
1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
23
24
29
30
31
37
39
40
25 26 27
28
32 33 34 35 36
38
2 2 . Ma in Bu tto n s
Re co rd / Pla y b a ck
→ See the Quick Start
3 0 . [Me n u ] b u tto n
You can select functions for playing back, recording or editing a
[Select/Listen to a Song], [Disk] button
Use this button to select internal songs or songs from floppy
3 1 . Tra ck b u tto n s
[Song Stylist] button
[Music Assistant] button
3 2 . [
(Re se t)] b u tto n
[Score Display] button
Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning of the
song.
3 3 . [
(Pla y / Sto p )] b u tto n
[Session Partner] button
Starts and stops playback or recording a song.
[Select Various Tones] button
3 4 . [
(Re c)] b u tto n
When pressed, this button places the instrument in recording
2 3 . To u ch Scre e n
This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching
3 5 . [
(Bw d )] b u tto n
Rewinds the song.
2 4 . Co n tra st k n o b
3 6 . [
(Fw d )] b u tto n
Fast-forwards the song.
2 5 . Dia l
Use this to change on-screen values.
3 7 . [Tra n sp o se ] b u tto n
2 6 . [-] [+] b u tto n s
Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played
Allow you to change on-screen values.
3 8 . [Vo ca l Effe ct] Bu tto n
2 7 . O n e To u ch Pro g ra m b u tto n
Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone
[Piano] button
[Arranger] button
3 9 . Disk Drive
Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic
You can insert a floppy disk for playing back or saving songs
2 8 . [Me lo d y In te llig e n ce ] Bu tto n
4 0 . Eje ct Bu tto n
2 9 . [To n e ] b u tto n s
1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa n e l De scrip tio n s
Re a r Pa n e l
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 . Mic
4 . Pe d a l Ja ck s
Connect the supplied damper pedal (DP-8), the expression
Vo lu m e Kn o b
5 . Lin e In Ja ck s
Mic In Ja ck
You can connect audio equipment or other digital instruments
2 . Co m p u te r
6 . Lin e O u t Ja ck s
Co m p u te r Sw itch
You can use these to play the notes from the KF-7 on an audio
device or record what you play on a tape recorder
Switches the connections for the MIDI connectors and the
Also, this switch is set to Mac, PC-1, or PC-2 according to the
type computer that’s connected.
7 . [Po w e r] Sw itch
Co m p u te r Co n n e cto r
8 . DC In Ja ck
You can connect a computer to this jack to exchange
*
You can’t use the MIDI Out/In connector and the Computer
connector at the same time.
3 . MIDI O u t/ In Co n n e cto rs
Connect between these and external MIDI instruments to
1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment
Main Features .....................................................................................7
Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
Main Screens .....................................................................................19
Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You
Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles
Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance
Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment
Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play
(Advanced 3D) ..........................................................................28
Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality
(Equalizer)..................................................................................30
1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to
Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting
Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
Use Your Voice to Select the Tempo
Muting Some Parts Before Playing
Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre
Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording
Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds
Repeated Recording at the Same Location
Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back
Re-Recording Part of Your Performance
Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs
Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords
Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During
Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Co n te n ts
Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles
Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself
Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments
Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard
Sending Tone Change Messages (Program Change/ Bank
Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device
Changing How Rapidly Sounds Are Expressed According to
Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo
Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads
Tone List ..........................................................................................165
SFX Set List......................................................................................171
Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified
Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On
Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KF-7
Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off
Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance
(Panel Lock) ....................................................................................152
1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be fo re Yo u Sta rt Pla y in g
In sta llin g th e Mu sic Sta n d
Co n n e ctin g Pe d a ls
fig.00-03.j
925
* Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5; sold separately).
By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing
malfunction and/or damage to the unit.
1 . Connect the supplied pedals (DP-8) to one of the
pedal jacks.
fig.00-03.j
1 . Using the supplied screws, attach the music stand
to the back of the KF-7 as illustrated.
Be sure to use the supplied screws for attaching the
music stand.
Turn the screws clockwise until they’re held in place–but
don’t tighten them yet.
Expression Pedal
(EV-5)
R o l a n d
2 . Put the music stand between the screws and the
Pedal Switch
(DP-8)
KF-7’s body.
3 . While supporting the music stand with one hand,
secure it in place by turning the screws.
When connected to the Damper jack, the pedal can be
used as a damper pedal.
* When attaching the music stand, support it firmly with one
hand to make sure that you don’t drop it. Be careful, so you
don’t get your fingers pinched.
When connected to Sostenuto, the pedal can be used as a
sostenuto pedal.
When connected to Soft, the pedal can be used as a soft
pedal.
* Do not apply excessive force to the installed music stand.
* Unplugging a pedal cord from the unit while the power is on
may cause the pedal’s effect to be applied without stopping. Be
sure to switch off the power to the unit before attempting to
disconnect or connect a pedal cord.
4 . To remove the music stand, support it with one
hand while loosening the screws.
* After removing the music stand, don’t forget to retighten the
screws.
DP-8
The DP-8 pedal controls the half damper function, a must for
authentic piano performances. Switching the DP-8’s function
switch to “Continuous” allows you to perform using the half
damper function.
Co n n e ct th e Po w e r Co rd
924
* To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit
(should the plug be pulled out accidentally), and to avoid
applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack, anchor the
power cord using the cord hook, as shown in the illustration.
Damper Pedal jack
of the KF-7
Pedal Cord
Cord Hook
The cord of
Half Damper
Pedal
the supplied AC Adaptor
Switch Control
To the AC Outlet
1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be fo re Yo u Sta rt Pla y in g
Da m p e r Pe d a l
Use this pedal to sustain the sound.
Tu rn in g th e Po w e r O n a n d O ff
941
While the pedal is depressed, long lingering reverberations
continue to be added to the sound after you release from the
keys. When you depress the damper pedal on an acoustic
piano, the sound from the strings that were struck resonates
with other strings, adding rich reverberations and broadness
to the sound. You can adjust this resonance (Sympathetic
Resonance) when the damper pedal is depressed.
● You can vary the amount of resonance applied when the
N O TE
Be sure to follow the steps below when turning the power on or off.
By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing
malfunction and/ or damage to speakers and other devices.
Tu rn in g O n th e Po w e r
1 . Before you switch on the power, turn the volume down
all the way by rotating the [Volume] knob.
fig.00-04
So ste n u to Pe d a l
When this pedal is depressed, reverberations are applied
only to the keys being played at that time.
So ft Pe d a l
This pedal is used to make the sound softer.
Playing with the soft pedal depressed produces a sound that
is not as strong as when otherwise played with the
equivalent strength. This is the same function as the left
pedal of an acoustic piano.
2 . Press the [Power] switch on the back of the unit.
After a few seconds, the unit becomes operable and
playing the keyboard produces sound.
● When connected to the Sostenuto jack or the Soft jack, you can
also assign other functions to the connected pedal. For more
● By providing two more pedals, you can use three pedals at the
same time. If you wish to purchase the optional pedal (DP-2/
DP-6), please contact the dealer where you purchased the
keyboard.
Adjust the volume at appropriate levels.
fig.00-05.j
Rear panel
Lower position
ON
942
N O TE
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few
seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate
normally.
Tu rn in g O ff th e Po w e r
1 . Before switching the power off, turn the volume all the
way down by rotating the [Volume] knob.
2 . Press the [Power] switch on the back of the unit.
The power is switched off.
fig.00-06.j
Rear panel
Upper position
OFF
1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be fo re Yo u Sta rt Pla y in g
Ad ju stin g th e So u n d ’s
Vo lu m e a n d Brillia n ce
Co n n e ctin g a Micro p h o n e
You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy
karaoke with the KF-7.
fig.00-09
Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume.
Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of
the sound.
fig.00-07.e
Min
Max
Mellow
Bright
1 . Connect a microphone to the Mic In jack on the back of
the instrument.
2 . Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob next to the Mic In jack to
Co n n e ctin g He a d p h o n e s
adjust the volume level for the microphone.
The unit’s speakers will go silent when you plug in
● You can use a microphone (sold separately). When purchasing
a microphone, please consult the vendor where you bought the
KF-7.
headphones. This makes it convenient for playing at night, or
at other times when you do not want to disturb others.
fig.00-08
So m e N o te s o n Usin g a Micro p h o n e
•
Be careful of high volume levels when using mikes late
at night or early in the morning.
•
When connecting a microphone to the KF-7, be sure to
lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when
the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by
the speakers.
983
•
Howling could be produced depending on the location
of microphones relative to speakers. This can be
remedied by:
1 . Plug the headphones into the Phones jack at the front,
on the left side of the piano.
The sound from the built-in speakers stops. Now, sound
is heard only through the headphones.
-
-
Changing the orientation of the microphone.
Relocating microphone at a greater distance from
speakers.
2 . Use the [Volume] knob on the KF-7 to adjust the
volume of the headphones.
-
Lowering volume levels.
● Use Stereo headphones.
So m e N o te s o n Usin g He a d p h o n e s
•
To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones
only by the headset or the plug.
•
The headphones may be damaged if the volume is too
high when they are plugged in. Lower the volume on the
KF-7 before plugging in the headphones.
•
To prevent possible auditory damage, loss of hearing, or
damage to the headphones, the headphones should not
be used at an excessively high volume. Use the
headphones at a moderate volume level.
1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be fo re Yo u Sta rt Pla y in g
● Ba sic Scre e n
The following screen is called Basic screen.
Ab o u t th e To u ch Scre e n
The KF-7 makes use of a touch screen.
Song name or
Music Style name
This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by
touching the screen lightly.
Tempo
Beat Measure
The Tone names are
selected appear.
N O TE
•
•
•
The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with
your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can
damage the touch screen. Be careful not to press too
hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the
touch screen.
These information are
displayed, when you use the
automatic accompaniment.
The positioning of the touch screen may become
displaced due to changes in the surrounding
environment and over time. If this happens, follow the
You can usually display this screen by touching <Exit>
several times.
Follow either of the procedures described below to display it.
•
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for
automatic accompaniment.
Do not place items on the touch screen.
•
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press
one of the Tone buttons, then touch <Exit>.
● Ad ju stin g th e Co n tra st o f th e
Scre e n
To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast
● Usin g th e Ma in Ico n s
knob located at the right side of the screen.
With the KF-7, you can many other screens besides the Basic
screen to do things. The on-screen graphics that appear three
dimensional work like buttons. These are called “Icons.”
The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows.
Some screens consist on two or more pages.
You can display the next page or the previ-
ous page of the screen by touching these
icons.
Touch this to cancel the currently editing
setting or exit the screen that is currently
displayed. You can usually display the Ba-
sic screen by touching <Exit> several times.
Ma in Scre e n s
When you select an internal song or music
files that includes the lyrics data, this icon
appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
● Pia n o Scre e n
Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen
N O TE
The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict
what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that
your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display
may not always match what appears in the manual.
1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pla y in g th e Ke y b o a rd Lik e a Pia n o
(O n e -To u ch Pia n o )
You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single
button.
fig.panel1-1
1 .
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
A “Piano screen” like the one shown below will appear.
fig.d-piano.eps_60
Since this instrument faithfully
reproduces real acoustic piano
action and response, keys
played in the top one-and-one-
half-octave range continue to
resonate, regardless of the
damper pedal action, and the
tone in this range is audibly
different. The Key Transpose
to change the range that is
unaffected by the damper
pedal.
When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the KF-7 will switch to the
following settings, regardless of the current panel settings.
•
keyboard returns to a single section.
You can change the piano
performance settings by
touching <Functions> on the
screen. For more information,
•
•
•
The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected.
Ch a n g in g th e Pia n o So u n d
Touch the piano lid on the screen, and listen to the tone change as you slide your
finger or touch
or
to open and close the lid.
This simulates the actual changes in sound that occur when the lid of a grand piano
is set at different heights.
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
the lyrics data, <lyrics>
appears in the Piano screen or
Basic screen. Touch this to
display the lyrics.
2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pe rfo rm in g w ith a Va rie ty o f To n e s
(To n e Bu tto n s)
The KF-7 comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you
enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles.
For more about the names of
Tones, take a look at the “Tone
The built-in sounds are called “Tones.” The sounds are organized into six tone
groups, which are assigned to the [Tone] buttons.
fig.panel1-2
1 .
Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group.
You’ll see that button’s indicator light up.
The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group you’ve selected.
fig.d-tonesel.eps_60
This screen is called the “Tone selection screen.”
You can touch <Audition> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone.
Touch
to switch the screen and display the next selection.
You can touch <Search> to find tones according to the search criteria you specify
2 .
3 .
Select a tone, then touch the tone name.
You’ll hear the tone you’ve selected when you play the keyboard.
You can use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select
tones.
Touch <Exit>.
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Pla y in g Pe rcu ssio n In stru m e n ts o r So u n d Effe cts
You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal
sounds.
fig.panel1-2
1 .
2 .
Press the [Select Various Tones] button and watch the indicator light up.
Touch <Drums> or <SFX>.
fig.d-drum.eps_60
The combination of sounds
assigned to the keyboard
varies according to the drum
Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound.
You can also have play sounds by touching the screen.
3 .
Touch <Exit> several times.
This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Usin g Ke y w o rd s to Se a rch fo r To n e s (To n e Se a rch )
You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical
style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name.
1 .
2 .
Press any Tone button.
The tone selection screen appears.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Tone search screen” appears.
fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60
Co n d itio n Se a rch scre e n
N a m e Se a rch scre e n
Touch here to switch these screens.
In condition search, tones
satisfying all of the selected
search criteria are sought.
Se a rch in g b y Co n d itio n s
3 .
4 .
Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to
select the search conditions.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the tone.
Touch <Exit> to return to the tone search screen.
Se a rch in g b y To n e N a m e
3
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen.
4 .
Decide which character is to be used for the search.
Enter the character you’re searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the
character switches between alphabets and numerals.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
5 .
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the tone name to select the Tone.
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pe rfo rm in g w ith Tw o So u n d s La y e re d
To g e th e r (La y e r)
Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a “layer
performance.”
For instance, it’s possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously.
fig.layer.e
Gra n d Pia n o 1
Strin g s
1 .
Touch <Layer> at the bottom of the Basic screen.
fig.d-layer.eps_60
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
the lyrics data, <lyrics>
appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone
indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together.
When you touch Octave
<-><+> on the tone selection
screen, the pitch of the
Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the “right-hand
tone,” and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the “layer
tone.”
keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
Ch a n g in g th e to n e s
2 .
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
The tone name will be highlighted in white.
3 .
4 .
When you have selected the tone, touch <Exit>.
You can vary the volume-level
balance of the two tones. For
the Volume Balance for Each
Performance Part (Part
The display returns to the Basic screen.
Ca n ce llin g th e La y e r
5 .
Touch <Layer>.
The <Layer> icon reverts to black, and the layer performance is cancelled.
Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Pla y in g Diffe re n t To n e s w ith th e Le ft
a n d Rig h t Ha n d s (Sp lit)
Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different
sounds in each section is called “split performance.” The boundary key is called the
“split point.”
The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to
the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to “F#3.”
fig.split.e
Split Point
You can change the split point;
Aco u stic Ba ss
Gra n d Pia n o 1
1 .
At the Basic screen, touch <Split>.
fig.d-split.eps_60
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
the lyrics data, <lyrics>
appears in the Basic screen.
Touch this to display the lyrics.
The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section
of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-
hand section of the keyboard.
Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the “right-hand
tone,” and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the “left-hand
tone.”
When you touch Octave
<-><+> in the tone selection
screen, the pitch of the
Ch a n g in g th e To n e s
keyboard’s sound is changed
in octave units. To learn more,
2 .
Touch the name of the tone to be changed.
The tone name will be highlighted in white.
3 .
4 .
When you have selected the tone, touch <Exit>.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
You can change the volume
balance between the left- and
right-hand parts of the
Ca n ce llin g th e Sp lit
the Volume Balance for Each
Performance Part (Part
5 .
Touch <Split>.
The <Split> icon reverts to black, and the split performance is cancelled.
When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded.
2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Tu rn in g O n La y e r a n d Sp lit Pe rfo rm a n ce Sim u lta n e o u sly
Turning on both layer performance and split performance allows you to split the
When the keyboard has been
divided into upper and lower
sections, the damper pedal is
applied to only the upper
section. If you want to add
lingering reverberations to the
notes of the lower section, see
“Assigning Functions to
keyboard into two sections while playing two layered Tones in the right-hand part.
fig.d-layersplit.eps_60
(Pedal Setting/ User
● Sh iftin g th e Ke y b o a rd Pitch in O cta ve Ste p s
(O cta ve Sh ift)
the pitch of the keyboard’s sound in octave units. This function is called “Octave
Shift.”
You cannot use Octave Shift
when using a single tone for
the entire keyboard or in the
right-hand Tone during layer
performances.
For example, when using a layer performance, you can change the pitch of each
sound and layer the sounds. You can make the pitch of the keyboard’s left-hand part
match the pitch of the right-hand part during split performance.
1 .
On the Basic screen, touch <Layer> or <Split>.
The KF-7 switches to layer performance or split performance.
2 .
3 .
To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone you’ve selected.
Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen.
fig.d-octshift.eps_60
4 .
Touch Octave <-> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the
pitch of the sound.
Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave.
Each time you touch <->, the pitch is lowered one octave.
The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to
two octaves above the original (+2).
Touch <Exit> to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Ad d in g Re ve rb e ra tio n to th e So u n d (Re ve rb )
Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KF-7.
Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall.
fig.panel1-3
1 .
Press the [Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up.
A “Reverb screen” like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-reverb.eps_60
2 .
Touch an icon to select the performance space.
;
Display
Ground
Explanation
Wide open space with no reverberations.
Small room
Room
Lounge
Studio
Larger room
A recording studio
Gymnasium
Hall
In a gymnasium
Large concert hall reverberation
A domed ballpark
Dome
Cave
Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave
GS Room 1
GS Room 2
GS Room 3
GS Hall 1
GS Hall 2
Reproduces an indoor-type reverb.
Provides a clear, expansive reverberation.
Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives reverberation
with a greater sense of depth than GS Room.
Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the vibrations
of a metal plate).
GS Plate
GS Delay
A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the reflected
sounds of mountain echoes.
GS Pan Delay The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally.
2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
3 .
Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected.
No effect is applied when the
slider is moved all the way to
the left. In this case, the
button’s indicator won’t light
up when you press the
Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the
left for less.
You can also move the slider with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial.
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value.
When you touch <Exit>, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the previous
screen.
[Reverb] button.
Ca n ce llin g th e Effe ct
Press the [Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go out.
4 .
The reverb effect is eliminated.
● Ad d in g Th re e -Dim e n sio n a l Bre a d th to th e
So u n d s Yo u Pla y (Ad va n ce d 3 D)
You can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic
“Advanced 3D,” you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance.
fig.panel1-4
1 .
Press the [Advanced 3D] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Advanced 3D screen” appears.
fig.d-adv3d.eps_60
ON
OFF
2 .
Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part.
If all of the parts are switched
off, the [Advanced 3D]
Three-dimensional breadth is added to the performance part you’ve selected.
When you touch <Exit>, the Advanced 3D effect is activated, and you return to the
previous screen.
button’s indicator won’t light
up when you press the button.
Ca n ce llin g th e Effe ct
Press the [Advanced 3D] button and watch the indicator goes out.
3 .
The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of
the parts.
2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Se le ctin g th e to n e to w h ich th e e ffe ct is a p p lie d
With “Keyboard” in Advanced 3D set to On, you can select the parts to which the 3D
effect is to be applied when the keyboard is played.
1 .
2 .
Press the [Advanced 3D] button and watch the indicator light up.
On the Advanced 3D screen, touch <Option>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60
3 .
Touch <All Parts> or <Layer Part>.
Display
Explanation
The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard (the left-
hand tone, right-hand tone, and layer tone).
All Parts
The effect is applied only to the layer part.
is not applied to the keyboard performance, even if <Keyboard> on
the Advance 3D screen is set to On.
Layer Part
When you touch <Exit>, you return to the Advanced 3D screen.
2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ad ju stin g th e So u n d to Ach ie ve th e Pre fe rre d
To n e Q u a lity (Eq u a lize r)
The KF-7 features a built-in, five-band digital equalizer.
An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches (frequency ranges) to adjust the
sound balance for the overall performance. For example, you can boost the highs to
get a crisper sound, or boost the low end for a more powerful sound.
You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the
performance space.
If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound, you can correct
the distortion with the Master Level slider.
1 .
Press the [Equalizer] button.
The “Equalizer screen” appears.
fig.d-eq.eps_60
When <Flat> is selected (when
all sliders are at “0”), then even
when [Equalizer] is pressed,
the indicator does not light up.
2 .
Touch the Type icon to make your selection.
Display
Bottom
Power
Mild
Explanation
This setting greatly boosts the low end.
Boosts both the low- and high-frequency ranges.
Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant-sounding tone.
This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling.
This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant, sparkling sound.
All slider values are set to “0.”
Clear
Bright
Flat
User
3 .
Touch the slider to make adjustment.
Settings
Displayed
Description
Value
Low-frequency range. This is the range of frequen-
cies for instruments like drums, bass, organ, guitar
and strings.
Low
-
-60–0–+60
-60–0–+60
Mid-low-frequency range. This is the range of fre-
quencies for lower brass and woodwind instru-
ments.
3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Settings
Value
Displayed
Mid
Description
Midrange. This is the range of frequencies where
most instrument sounds are concentrated.
-60–0–+60
-60–0–+60
-60–0–+60
Mid-high-frequency range. The ear is most sensi-
tive to this frequency range.
-
High-frequency range. These frequencies add bril-
liance to the sound.
High
You can temper the distortion in the sound by low-
ering the level. Raising the level too much may
cause the sound to become distorted.
Master Level
-60–0–+60
You can also move the slider with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial.
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the slider to “0.”
When you touch <Exit>, the equalization is placed in effect, and you return to the
previous screen.
Ca n ce llin g th e e ffe ct
4 .
Press the [Equalizer] button and watch the indicator light go out.
The equalizer effect is cancelled.
● Sto rin g th e se ttin g s
You can store adjusted equalizer settings to <User>.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to call up your preferred
settings.
1 .
Press the [Equalizer] button and watch the indicator light up.
The Equalizer screen appears.
2 .
3 .
Adjust the equalizer.
Touch <Write>.
The settings are stored.
Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to select the stored settings.
3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Ad d in g Effe cts to Ea ch To n e a n d Vo ice
● Ap p ly in g Effe cts to th e So u n d (Effe cts)
You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the
For more on the effect types,
keyboard.
1 .
The “Tone selection screen” appears.
fig.d-octshift.eps_60
2 .
Then, touch <Effects>.
The “Effect screen” appears.
fig.d-effects.eps_60
N O TE
Selecting a different effect for
the left-hand Tone than the
one applied to the right-hand
Tone and Layer Tone may not
result in the effect you want.
Select the same effect as that
used for the right-hand Tone.
Ap p ly in g e ffe cts to th e so u n d
N O TE
When you select an effect type
that starts with “GS,” that type
of effect is also applied for the
chorus effect for the song or
that time.
3 .
Touch <ON>.
The effect selected with <Type> will be applied.
Se ttin g th e Effe ct
4 .
5 .
Touch <Type>
to select the type of effect.
Touch <Depth>
to adjust the amount of effect applied.
The amount increases as the value is raised.
You can also move the slider with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial.
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the slider to the initial value.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Tone selection screen.
3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Ca n ce llin g th e Effe ct
On the Effects screen, touch <Off>.
All [Voice] button tones with a
6 .
“GS” or “ ” logo appearing
after the tone name have the
same effect applied to them. If
the effect for one of the tones
About the Effect Settings
When the effects is set to ON, the appropriate effect is applied for the currently
selected sound. You can also apply different effect types to each tone (except GS
with the “GS” or “ ” logo is
changed, then the effects for
the other tones with the “GS”
tones and tones with the “ ” logo). Although turning off the power returns effects
store the settings even after the power is turned off.
or “ ” logo are also changed
automatically.
● Ad d in g Effe cts to Mic Vo ca ls (Vo ca l Effe ct)
With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals.
Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as “Vocal Effect.”
For details on connecting a
microphone, refer to
● Ho w to se le ct Vo ca l Effe ct
fig.panel1-5
1 .
Press the [Vocal Effect] button.
The “Vocal Effects screen” appears.
fig.d-vocalsfx.eps_60
2 .
Touch any one of the icons.
Icon
Description
Page
Echo
Adjusts the microphone echo.
Alters the microphone vocals.
Adds harmonies to the original voice.
Transformer
Harmonist
3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Icon
Description
Page
Allows you to start songs and Automatic Accom-
paniment using your own tempo.
Vocal Count In
Vocal Keyboard
Music Files
Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the
vocal scale.
You can play a specific part as harmony while
playing back a song.
3 .
When you touch <Exit>, the effect is applied and you return to the
previous screen.
Ca n ce llin g th e Vo ca l Effe ct
Press the [Vocal Effect] button and watch the indicator light go out.
4 .
The Vocal Effect function is cancelled.
● Ad ju stin g th e Ech o (Ech o )
1 .
fig.d-vo-echo.eps_60
2 .
3 .
Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal.
Touch the Echo Type <1> or <2> to change the echo type.
Displayed
Description
Adds basic reverberations.
Adds reverberations for a karaoke-type echo.
1
2
Touch <Exit> to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Alte rin g Vo ca ls (Tra n sfo rm e r)
When you use the Voice
Transformer function, the
resonance setting for the piano
reset.
With the KF-7, you can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone.
This is called the “Voice Transformer” function.
1 .
fig.d-vo-trans.eps_60
2 .
Touch any one of the icons.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Child
Explanation
Transforms the input into the sound of a child’s voice.
Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal.
Transforms the input into the sound of a robot’s voice.
Transforms the input into a duck’s quacking sound.
Transforms the input into an alien voice.
Bear
Robot
Duck
Alien
Computer
Female
Male
Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer.
Transforms male voices into female voices.
Transforms female voices into male voices.
3 .
Sing through the microphone.
Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected.
Ca n ce llin g th e Effe ct
Once again, touch the icon you selected in Step 2.
4 .
The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ad d in g Ha rm o n ie s (Ha rm o n ist)
When you use the Harmonist
function, the resonance setting
sometimes be reset. And the
effects applied to the keyboard
You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when you’re playing solo. This
is called the “Harmonist” function.
1 .
fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60
2 .
Touch any one of the icons.
Here’s what the different icons do.
Display
Duet
Explanation
Provides an effect resembling the sound of two people singing
the same melody.
Oct-Up
Adds another voice one octave higher than the original.
Adds another voice one octave lower than the original.
The melody being played on the keyboard becomes the harmony.
Adds harmony a fifth above the original.
Oct-Down
Keyboard
5th Up
3rd Up
Adds harmony a third above the original.
4th Down
Chords
Adds harmony a major fourth below the original.
Adds harmonies matching the chords designated with the keys.
Ca n ce llin g th e Effe ct
Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again.
3 .
The Harmonist function is cancelled.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● En a b lin g th e sta rt o f so n g s a n d a u to m a tic a cco m p a n im e n t w ith th e
so u n d o f y o u r vo ice (Vo ca l Co u n t-In )
You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the
microphone.
1 .
fig.d-vo-coin.eps_60
2 .
3 .
Touch <Arranger> or <Song>.
Display
Arranger
Song
Explanation
Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count.
The song starts at the tempo used for the count.
Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the mic.
Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song
or Music Style.
For example, if you select a time signature of 4/ 4, then count to four; count to three
when 3/ 4 time is selected.
The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you
speak into the microphone, and the song begins.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Vocal Effects screen.
● Pla y in g in stru m e n t so u n d s a t vo ca l p itch e s (Vo ca l Ke y b o a rd )
You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KF-7’s internal
Tones.
1 .
fig.d-vo-key.eps_60
3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
2 .
3 .
If the <OFF> icon is selected, touch the <ON> icon.
When you play the keys while
using Vocal Keyboard, the
tone selected for Vocal
Touch any of the icons to select a Tone.
You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button.
Keyboard is played.
When you sing into the microphone, the sung pitches are played using the selected
Tone.
Ca n ce llin g th e e ffe ct
4 .
Touch <OFF>.
The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
● Ad d in g h a rm o n ie s to a sp e cifie d p a rt (Mu sic File s)
When you sing while playing back a specified song data part, the harmony is added
using the pitches of the specified part.
1 .
2 .
Select the song to which you want to add harmony.
If selecting a song on a disk, insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. For more on how
fig.d-vo-music.eps_60
3 .
Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony.
When you sing into the microphone, harmony is added using the pitches of the
specified part.
Ca n ce llin g th e e ffe ct
Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again.
4 .
The Music Files function is cancelled.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Vocal Effects screen.
3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● En jo y in g Ka ra o k e Pe rfo rm a n ce s w ith Mu sic File s
Commercial music files
1 .
2 .
Connect a microphone.
designed for “karaoke” sing-
along are also available.
Consult your KF-7 dealer
when purchasing music files.
Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied.
3 .
Select a song.
If selecting a song on a disk, insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. For instructions
You can stop lyrics from being
4 .
5 .
Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons.
When you press the [
(Play/ Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing.
Sing along with the accompaniment.
When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
6 .
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment.
3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
Usin g th e Me tro n o m e a n d Rh y th m
(Rh y th m Pa rtn e r)
During playback of a song, or
when performing with
The KF-7 features a built-in metronome. Additionally, you can have Rhythm
patterns play, in the same manner as the metronome, just by pressing the [Rhythm]
button.
automatic accompaniment, the
sound of the metronome keeps
time with the beat of the song
or accompaniment.
The combination of the internal metronome and rhythm functions is called “Rhythm
Partner.”
fig.panel1-6
● Usin g th e Me tro n o m e
1 .
Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.
It is not possible to use the
simultaneously.
You will hear the metronome.
The following “Metronome screen” appears.
fig.d-metro.eps_60
You can touch <Exit> to have the metronome continue to play while you return to
the previous screen.
Sto p p in g th e m e tro n o m e
2 .
Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes
out.
4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ch a n g in g th e Me tro n o m e Se ttin g s
● Ad ju stin g th e te m p o
You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo of the metronome changes
automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song.
1 .
Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo.
You can also use the dial to
adjust the tempo. Turn it
clockwise for a faster tempo, or
counterclockwise for a slower
tempo.
You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of
= 20–250.
The metronome is automatically set to =108 when the power is turned on.
Pressing the [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song
accompaniment to the basic tempo.
● De te rm in in g th e te m p o w ith te m p o m a rk s
You can set the tempo by choosing a tempo indicator, such as “Allegro,” indicated
on the score.
1 .
On the Metronome screen, touch the tempo indicator bar graph.
The tempo is set to match the tempo mark.
fig.d-metro.eps_60
● Ch a n g in g th e b e a t o f th e m e tro n o m e
1 .
2 .
On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>.
The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen.
Choose the beat from among the selections by touching your choice.
You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices for the beat
When
is selected,
by touching
.
only the upbeat will sound.
4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ch a n g in g th e vo lu m e
The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels.
1 .
2 .
On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>.
The available choices for the volume level appear at the bottom of the screen.
Touch the volume icon you’ve selected.
When you touch
, the selection moves to the side, allowing you to access
other volume levels.
Choosing
sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing
sets
it to the highest level.
Choose
to silence the metronome sound.
● Ch a n g in g th e Ty p e o f So u n d
You can change the sound the metronome makes.
The setting is at “normal metronome sound” when the KF-7 is powered up.
1 .
2 .
On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>.
The available choices for the type of sound appear at the bottom of the screen.
Touch one of the items in the group to select a metronome sound.
Displayed
Description
Displayed
Description
Normal metronome
sound
Electronic metronome
sound
“1, 2, 3” in Japanese
Dog and cat sounds
Triangle and castanet
“1, 2, 3” in English
Wood block
Hand clap
4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ch a n g in g th e An im a tio n
A metronome that moves along with the tempo is usually displayed at the center of
the Metronome screen. You can change that picture to an animated bouncing ball, or
other animation.
1 .
On the Metronome screen, touch the <Type>.
The animation type will change.
Each time you touch the icon, the animation switches between “Metronome,”
“Doctor,” and “Bouncing Ball.”
● Ch a n g in g h o w th e m e tro n o m e b e a t (p a tte rn ) so u n d s
You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals.
1 .
2 .
On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>.
The available choices for the metronome pattern appear at the bottom of the screen.
Choose a pattern by touching your choice.
You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other pattern choices by
touching
.
Displayed
Description
Displayed
Description
Usual sound
Dotted half-note intervals
Dotted quarter-note
intervals
Half-note intervals
Quarter-note intervals
Eighth-note intervals
Single back beat added
Shuffle rhythm added
Dotted eighth-note
intervals
Sixteenth-note intervals
Triplet rhythm added
4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Pla y in g Rh y th m
The KF-7 features numerous internal rhythm patterns, which, like the metronome,
You cannot have the
metronome or automatic
accompaniment play
can be played and stopped with the press of a single button.
Playing rhythm patterns instead of the metronome lets you enjoy performances that
feel like live sessions.
simultaneously with the
Rhythm. When you start
playing the metronome or
automatic accompaniment
while a Rhythm is playing, the
Rhythm stops.
1 .
Press the [Rhythm] button and watch the indicator light up.
The Rhythm will sound.
The following “Rhythm screen” appears.
fig.d-rhythm.eps_60
When you touch <Exit>, the Rhythm sound continues to play, as you return to the
previous screen.
Sto p p in g th e Rh y th m
2 .
Press the [Rhythm] button once more and the indicator light goes out.
● Ch a n g in g th e Rh y th m se ttin g s
Depending on the beat, there
may be only one Rhythm to
choose form.
● Ch a n g in g th e Rh y th m
1 .
Touch a Rhythm name on the Rhythm screen.
The selected Rhythm plays.
The Rhythms available for selection will depend on the beat.
Touch
to switch the screens and show other choices.
For more on the Rhythm types,
● Ch a n g in g th e b e a t o f Rh y th m
1 .
2 .
In the Rhythm screen, touch <Beat>.
The available choices for the beat appear at the bottom of the screen.
Choose the beat by touching your choice.
You can scroll the display to one side or the other and show other choices by
touching
.
4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 1 Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ch a n g in g th e vo lu m e
The rhythm volume can be adjusted to ten different levels.
1 .
2 .
On the Rhythm screen, touch <Volume>.
The available choices for volume level appear at the bottom of the screen.
Select a volume icon.
When you touch
, the selection moves to the side, allowing you to access
other volume levels.
Choosing
sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing
sets
it to the highest level.
Choose
to silence the Rhythm sound.
4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Mu sic Sty le s a n d Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
W h a t is Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t?
For instructions on playing the
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button for Automatic Accompaniment’s
optimum settings. Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with
accompaniment in a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left
hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when
performing alone!
Automatic Accompaniment,
W h a t Are Mu sic Sty le s?
Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called “Music Styles.”
There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own
unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a
unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which
interact to create the musical character.
Ele m e n ts o f Mu sic Sty le s
A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called “divisions.”
Division
Intro
Description
Played at the start of a song.
Original
The basic accompaniment pattern.
Variation
This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original.
Fill In To Original
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the
mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the
variation.
Fill In To
Variation
Ending
The conclusion of a song.
In addition, Music Styles are built from: “Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,”
“Accompaniment 2,” and “Accompaniment 3.”
4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pe rfo rm in g Usin g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
(O n e -To u ch Arra n g e r)
Here’s how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel2-1
1 .
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
When you select an internal
song or music file that includes
the lyrics data, <lyrics>
The Basic screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
appears in the Piano screen or
Basic screen. Touch this to
display the lyrics.
Normally, when you change a
Music Style, the tempo and
tone change to selections that
go well with the selected
Music Style. If you do not want
to change the tempo and tone,
Styles Without Changing the
Tone or Tempo (One Touch
Observe the settings:
•
The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment
chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard.
•
•
A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen.
The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set.
For instructions on selecting
Music Styles, refer to
2 .
Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro.
Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right.
When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes.
fig.arr-split.e
Split Point (
)
F
3
For instructions on starting
and stopping the
accompaniment, refer to
The range specifyed a chord
3 .
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
You can change the range in
which chords are played.
After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops.
4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Ab o u t Ch o rd s
A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are
indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord
type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord.
For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note “C” and the chord
type “m” (minor). C m is made up of the three notes “C,” “E ” and “G.”
“C m” is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen.
fig.chord.e
Cm
E
Chord Type
Root Note
C
G
Root Note
All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with
correspond to the notes shown below.
or
added, and
fig.chord-root.e
● Pla y in g Ch o rd s w ith Sim p le Fin g e rin g
(Ch o rd In te llig e n ce )
“Chord Intelligence” is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the
You can cancel the Chord
Intelligence function. For more
How Chords Are Played and
Specified (Arranger Config)”
moment you play a key.
To play a “C” chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and
G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a “C” chord
accompaniment.
fig.chord-intel.e
• How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:
Major
Minor
Ex: C m
Ex:
C
Play the root and
the third key above it.
Play the chord root.
For more information about
chord fingering, refer to the
Minor Seventh
Seventh
Ex: C 7
Ex: C m7
Play the root,
Play the root and
the third key above it, and
the second key below it.
the second key above it.
Major Seventh
Diminished
Ex: C maj 7
Ex:
C dim
Play the root and
the first key below it.
Play the root and
the sixth key above it.
4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Vie w in g Ch o rd Fin g e rin g s (Ch o rd Fin d e r)
Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes
of the chord on the screen.
1 .
On the Basic screen, touch <
>.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
2 .
Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about.
The chord fingering appears on screen.
fig.d-crdfind.eps_60
For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch
<C>, then touch <#>.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Basic screen.
4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Se le ctin g Mu sic Sty le s (Mu sic Sty le Bu tto n s)
You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons.
Music Styles are divided into six groups, with each assigned to one of the Music Style
buttons.
fig.panel2-2
1 .
2 .
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
For more on the Music Style
names, refer to the “Music
Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group.
Watch the indicator button light up.
Six of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen.
fig.d-stylesel.eps_60
This screen is called the “Style Selection screen”.
You can listen to the Music Style by touching <Audition>.
Touch
to switch the screen and display the next selections.
3 .
4 .
Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.
You can use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to automatically switch pages and select
Styles.
By changing the tempo and
Tone, you can enjoy
Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen.
performing with a different
ambience, even in the same
Music Style.
When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected.
When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo,
5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
5 .
Touch <Exit>.
The display returns to the Basic screen.
When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style
is automatic.
● Se le ctin g Mu sic Sty le s o n Disk s
fig.panel2-3
1 .
2 .
If you’re using the disk drive
for the first time, be sure to
read the important notes on
p. 6.
Press the Music Style [User] button.
fig.d-styldisk.eps_60
When you touch <User/ Disk> on the lower part of the screen, the screen for
selecting user memory or disk Styles appears.
When you touch <Preset>, the screen for selecting “Trad/ Kids” Music Styles
appears.
3 .
Touch
.
The Music Styles saved on the disk are displayed.
When you touch <
>, the Music Styles stored in User memory are displayed.
4 .
5 .
Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name.
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
On the KF-7, you can save
multiple user Styles to user
memory. Take a look at
You can now perform in the selected Music Style.
Music Styles selected from floppy disks are stored until the power is turned off. Even
after ejecting the floppy disk, by pressing the Music Style [User] button, you can
perform using the most recently selected Music Style.
5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Usin g Ke y w o rd s to Se a rch fo r Mu sic Sty le s
(Sty le Se a rch )
You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or
other criteria you set.
Only the KF-7’s internal Music
Styles are searchable.
You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names.
1 .
2 .
Press one of the Music Style buttons.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Style Search screen” appears.
fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60
Co n d itio n Se a rch scre e n
N a m e Se a rch scre e n
Touch here to switch these screens.
In a condition search, the KF-7
looks for Music Styles
satisfying all of the selected
search criteria.
● Se a rch in g b y Co n d itio n s
3 .
4 .
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the
dial to select the search conditions.
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Style Search screen.
● Se a rch in g b y Mu sic Sty le n a m e
3 .
4 .
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
Decide which character you’ll use for the search.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
5 .
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear on the display.
Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style.
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen.
5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g O n ly Mu sic Sty le Rh y th m Pa tte rn s
You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles.
fig.panel2-4
N O TE
1 .
2 .
Some Music Styles do not
include rhythm patterns.
When you select these Style
patterns, no rhythm patterns
are played, even when you
play on the left side of the
keyboard.
Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played.
3 .
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro.
Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by
pressing the [Intro/ Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with
Ad ju stin g th e Acco m p a n im e n t Te m p o
fig.panel2-5
When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the [-]
[+] buttons and the dial to change the tempo.
The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song
to the basic tempo.
You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the
accompaniment is playing.
5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Sta rtin g a n d Sto p p in g th e Acco m p a n im e n t
Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the
accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on
the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for
the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and
stops.
fig.panel2-6
● Ha vin g th e Acco m p a n im e n t Sta rt Sim u lta n e o u sly
W h e n Yo u Pla y th e Ke y b o a rd (Sy n c)
1 .
2 .
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,
causing the indicators of both buttons to flash.
The Sync Start settings go into effect.
Sync Start is set immediately
after the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button is pressed.
Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard.
As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously.
● Ch a n g in g th e in tro
When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/ Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro,
or prevent the intro from playing.
Sta rtin g w ith o u t a n in tro
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out.
Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
To sta rt w ith a sh o rt in tro a d d e d
On the Basic screen, touch the Intro/Ending Type <2>.
fig.d-intro2.eps_60
Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the
accompaniment starts.
5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Sta rtin g a t th e p re ss o f a b u tto n
1 .
Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously,
and the indicators lights go out.
The Sync Start function is cancelled.
2 .
3 .
Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard.
Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing.
Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button.
When you press the [Intro/ Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment
starts. When you press the [Start/ Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without
the intro.
When you press the [Intro/ Ending] button after touching Intro/ Ending Type <2> on
the Basic screen, a short intro plays.
You can change the sound of
the chord tone and bass tone.
Chords Are Played and
Specified (Arranger Config)”
Chord Tones and Bass Tones
When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/ Stop]
button’s indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the “Chord Tone,” and
the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the “Bass Tone.”
● Sto p p in g Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Sto p p in g w ith a n a d d e d e n d in g
1 .
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops.
When you press the [Intro/ Ending] button after touching Intro/ Ending Type <2> on
the Basic screen, a short ending plays.
● Sto p p in g a t th e sa m e tim e th e b u tto n is p re sse d
1 .
Press the [Start/Stop] button.
The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button.
5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Ha vin g a Co u n t So u n d Pla y a t th e En d o f th e
In tro (Co u n td o w n )
If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to
the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing.
fig.countdown.e
When the Intro has finished playing,
the accompaniment plays.
Ex: 4/4
Intro
1
2
3
4
Count Sound
1 .
2 .
Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.
If you don’t want the metronome to play, press the [Metronome] button and
indicator light goes out.
Touch <Countdown>.
The following “Countdown settings screen” appears.
fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60
3 .
Touch <Switch>
to set this to “ON.”
When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts,
and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro.
● Ca n ce llin g th e co u n td o w n
1 .
2 .
In the Metronome screen, touch <Countdown>.
For more about settings on the
Countdown screen, refer to
Touch <Switch>
to set this to “OFF.”
This sets the KF-7 so that the countdown does not play.
5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Mo d ify in g a n Acco m p a n im e n t
You can add variation to the
When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the
accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes.
Automatic Accompaniment by
assigning different functions to
the Performance Pads and
pedals. For more information,
Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/ User
● Ch a n g in g th e Acco m p a n im e n t Pa tte rn
(Fill In Bu tto n s)
There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a
fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns
change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler
original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second
half.
What’s a “Fill In”?
A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a “Fill In.”
The KF-7 automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style.
fig.panel2-7
Press the Fill In [Variation] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played.
Press the Fill In [Original] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played.
Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the
appropriate place and time.
Ad d in g a fill-in w ith o u t ch a n g in g th e a cco m p a n im e n t p a tte rn
You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern.
Press the lit [Original] or [Variation] Fill In button during the performance.
5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Ch a n g in g th e In strum e n ta l Ma k e up o f Music Style s
(Style O rch e stra to r)
You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called “Style
Orchestrator.” Each Music Style has four different accompaniment arrangements.
fig.panel2-8
1 .
2 .
Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads.
When you press the [Phrase]
button or [User Function]
buttons, the [Style
Press Performance Pad [1]–[4] to change the arrangement for the
accompaniment.
Orchestrator] button’s
indicator goes out, and the
function of the Performance
Pads changes. For details refer
Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up.
Pad [1] plays the simplest arrangement, and Pad [4] gives you the most elaborate
arrangement.
Style Orchestrator
Basic
Explanation
N O TE
This is the simplest arrangement.
When simple Music Styles are
selected, there may be no
change in the arrangement
even when you use the Style
Orchestrator function.
Advanced 1
Advanced 2
Full
This is a more involved arrangement.
This is the most elavorate arrangement.
You cannot change the
orchestration of the Styles with
the Performance Pad when the
[Style Orchestrator/ User
Function] button’s indicator is
Functions to Pedals and
Setting/ User Functions)” (p.
5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
● Pla y in g Ph ra se s (Ph ra se )
fig.panel2-9
1 .
Press the [Phrase] button and watch the indicator light up.
The instrument is set so that phrases play with the Performance Pads.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-phrase.eps_60
When you switch Music Styles,
the phrases assigned to the
Performance Pads are
switched. If you do not want to
have the phrase settings
change when you change
Music Styles, refer to
“Changing Music Styles
Tempo (One Touch Setting)”
2 .
3 .
Touch
to choose the type of phrase.
Press one of the Pads.
The selected phrase plays.
When the phrase continues playing, press the Pad once more to stop it.
With certain phrases, the accompaniment stops while the phrase is playing.
When you touch <Exit>, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the same
function remains assigned to the Pads.
5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ad d in g Ha rm o n y to th e Rig h t-Ha n d
Pa rt (Me lo d y In te llig e n ce )
You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard.
While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is
automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function
is called “Melody Intelligence.”
fig.panel2-10
1 .
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up.
When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is
added.
The following “Melody Intelligence screen” appears.
fig.d-melointel.eps_60
2 .
3 .
Select and touch a harmony type.
Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically
added.
With some harmonies, Tones
may change automatically.
Also, when you play several
keys at the same time, in some
cases harmony may be added
to one note.
When you touch <Exit>, you’re returned to the previous screen, while the Melody
Intelligence function remains selected.
Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light
goes out.
The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled.
6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla y in g So u n d s in th e Le ft Ha n d Du rin g a
Pe rfo rm a n ce (Lo w e r To n e )
Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not
produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the
<Lower> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play
simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment.
1 .
2 .
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This sets the Automatic Accompaniment.
On the Basic screen, touch <Lower>.
Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will
sound, and the accompaniment chord changes.
fig.d-lower.eps_60
Sto p p in g th e so u n d in th e le ft-h a n d
3 .
Touch <Lower>.
The <Lower> icon reverts to black, and the left-hand Tones stop playing.
6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Pla yin g th e Pia n o w ith Acco m p a n im e n t Ad d e d
(Pia n o Style Arra n g e r)
Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of
the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized
over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment
without splitting the keyboard. This function is called “Piano Style Arranger.”
This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song
by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location
of a keyboard split.
1 .
2 .
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off.
fig.d-pianist.eps_60
3 .
4 .
Play the keyboard.
The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard.
6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Ad ju stin g th e Vo lu m e Ba la n ce fo r Ea ch
Pa rt (Ba la n ce )
You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard,
and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style.
N O TE
● Ch a n g in g th e Vo lu m e Ba la n ce b e tw e e n th e
When this knob is turned
completely to the
Acco m p a n im e n t a n d th e Ke y b o a rd (Ba la n ce Kn o b )
You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the
notes you play on the keyboard.
Accompaniment side, no
sounds from the keyboard are
audible, even when the keys
are pressed. You can usually
leave the knob at the center
position.
1 .
Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob.
fig.volbal.e
● Ad ju stin g th e Vo lu m e Ba la n ce fo r Ea ch
Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa rt (Pa rt Ba la n ce )
You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the
balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard.
fig.panel2-11
1 .
Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up.
The following “Part Balance screen” appears.
Touch
to switch the two screens.
fig.d-partbal1.eps_60
Switch the screens
The volume balance between each of the performance parts in the Music Style is
indicated.
6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 2 Au to m a tic Acco m p a n im e n t
Display
Rhythm
Performance part
Music Style Rhythm Part
Bass
Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, Accompani-
Accomp
Short phrases sounded when the Performance Pads
Phrase
fig.d-partbal2.eps_60
Switch the screens
This shows the volume balance between each of the keyboard’s Tones when layer
Displayed
Drums
Tone Part
Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys
Lower
Layer
Upper
Left-hand Tone
Layer Tone
Right-hand Tone
2 .
Touch each slider
to adjust the volume balance.
You can also make these adjustments by touching the adjustment sliders and then
using the [-] [+] buttons or the dial.
Touch <Exit> to go back to the previous screen.
6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Pla y in g a So n g
Now, let’s try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files,
and songs saved to floppy disks.
You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back
from that point.
fig.panel3-1
Re co rd / Pla y b a ck b u tto n s
Se le ctin g th e so n g
When playing back songs on floppy disks, first insert the floppy disk in the disk
If the floppy disk is being used
for the first time, refer to p. 6.
drive.
1 .
Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.
The following “Genre Selection screen” appears.
fig.d-genre.eps_60
When you touch the genre for the song you want to play, the screen changes.
When selecting a song from a disk, touch, <Disk>.
The following “Song Selection screen” appears.
fig.d-songsel.eps_60
6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
When you touch <
random order.
>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in
If there is recorded song data,
the “Delete song” screen
appears.
When you touch <
>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played
in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback
resumes from the initial song.
<
<
>: Information for the selected song is displayed.
>: The selected song is played back. This changes to <
> while the song
is played back; playback stops when you touch <
>< >: The song genre changes.
>.
If it’s okay to delete the song,
touch <OK>. If you do not
want to delete the song, touch
<Cancel>, and either save the
or register the song to the
<
2 .
Touch the name of the song to be played back.
The selected song name appears at “0:.”
You use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to select songs.
Pla y in g b a ck
Press the [
N O TE
When you start playback of
songs, the measure number on
the Basic screen appears in
reverse video. The
3 .
(Play/Stop)] button.
The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins.
Sto p p in g th e So n g
Press the [
performance data is being
loaded while the indication is
highlighted; please wait a few
moments for this to be
4 .
(Play/Stop)] button once again.
The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops.
When the song is finished, playback stops automatically.
completed.
Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song.
Song Number <0:>
Record/Playback Buttons
fig.composer.e
In the Song Selection screen,
the title of the currently
selected song appears at “0.”
Song Number “0” is used by
all genres. Recorded
performances are also stored to
“0.” The song in Song Number
“0” is erased when the power
is turned off.
Track buttons:
Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these
buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed
[
(Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.
N O TE
[
(Play/Stop)] button:
Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.
When using markers to specify
you can rewind and fast
forward only within the range
between Marker A and
Marker B.
[
[
(Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time
the button is pressed. When held down, the song “rewinds” continuously.
(Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the
button is pressed. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously.
[
Holding down the [
(Play/ Stop)] button and pressing the [
(Fwd)] button moves
you to the end of the song.
6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Usin g Ke y w o rd s to Se a rch fo r So n g s (So n g Se a rch )
You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo
or genre.
Only the KF-7’s internal songs
are searchable.
You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name.
1 .
2 .
Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.
Touch <Search>.
The following “Song Search screen” appears.
fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60
Co n d itio n Se a rch scre e n
N a m e Se a rch scre e n
Touch here to switch these screens.
● Se a rch in g b y co n d itio n s
3 .
Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the
dial to select the search conditions.
With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs.
You can use four different criteria in searches: “Chords,” “Lyrics,” “Fingering”
(fingering numbers), and “Any.” By selecting a song containing any of this data, then
displaying it in the KF-7’s score, you can display information about the selected data.
4 .
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Song Search screen.
● Se a rch in g b y so n g n a m e
3 .
4 .
Touch <By Name>.
Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen.
Decide which character you will use for the search.
Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in
succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals.
The selected character appears in the middle of the screen.
5 .
Touch <Search>.
The search results appear in the display.
Touch the song name to select the song.
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the previous screen.
6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Registering the Songs You Lik e (Fa vorites)
You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to “Favorites,”
allowing you to select these songs easily.
Se le ctin g th e So n g
On the KF-7, you can also
register songs on floppy disks
to the Favorites. For details,
1 .
Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.
2 .
Touch the song name to select the song to be registered.
Re g iste rin g to Fa vo rite s
3 .
Touch <Add>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60
4 .
Touch <OK>.
The selected song is registered to Favorites.
Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the
Song Selection screen.
6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Re m o vin g So n g s fro m Fa vo rite s
This deletes registered songs for Favorites.
1 .
In the Song Selection screen, select Favorites for the genre.
fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60
2 .
3 .
Touch the name of the song to be deleted.
Touch <Del>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60
4 .
Touch <OK>.
The song is deleted.
6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Disp la y in g th e Sco re
The KF-7 can display scores not only for the internal songs, but for music files and
performances recorded with the KF-7. This is very convenient for performing while
reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play
back a music file with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen.
Se le ctin g th e so n g
When playing back songs on floppy disks, first insert the floppy disk in the disk
drive.
1 .
2 .
Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select a song.
Press the [Score Display] button.
The “Score screen” appears.
fig.d-score.eps_60
In some internal songs, the
fingering is displayed.
The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
possible fingering.
Icon
Description
Displays an enlarged score.
You can also display the note names.
Chord names can be displayed
in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KF-7’s Chord
The score and keyboard are displayed. This allows you to
check the keys that are pressed for the sounds played back.
Selects the part for which the score is displayed.
* You can specify the track or part to be displayed with
<Option>
This allows you to practice the song repeatedly while reading
<Tutor>
The soft pedal functions as the “Replay.” When you press the
pedal during the playback of the song, playback stops, and
when you release the pedal, playback resumes starting at the
beginning of that measure. When the pedal is pressed in rapid
succession, playback is returned the same number of
measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed.
In situations such as when you want to hear a difficult phrase
repeated a number of times, you can press the pedal to go to
an earlier point in the song.
<Replay>
7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
N O TE
3 .
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
No notes are shown in the
Playback of the song begins, and the score advances along with the progression of
the performance.
score if the selected part
contains no data. To change
the part being displayed, refer
N o te s Re g a rd in g th e Sco re Disp la y
•
•
When playback of a song begins,
appears in the Score screen. While this
symbol is displayed, performance data is being loaded from floppy disk or
internal memory. It may take thirty seconds to a minute or more to read the
data. Please wait.
The displayed scores are based on music files. Priority is placed on the
readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult,
high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared
with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for
viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed scores, or complex songs.
•
•
On the score display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range
displayed on the screen and may not be visible.
Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the score or change
the displayed part during playback of the song.
● To u ch in g N o te s to Co n firm th e So u n d s
(To u ch th e N o te s)
In the Score screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen.
When you touch <
> to show the keyboard on the screen, the touched note is
indicated by the corresponding note on the keyboard. This allows you confirm notes
by sight, sound, and touch.
In addition, when you trace part of the score with your finger, the traced segment is
played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like.
fig.d-score-key.eps_60
7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Ma k in g De ta ile d Se ttin g s fo r th e Sco re Disp la y
You can change the part appearing on the score display and change the manner in
which the score is displayed.
1 .
2 .
Press the [Score Display] button to display the Score screen.
Touch <Option>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-scoreopt.eps_60
Switch the screens
3 .
Touch
for the parameter being set to select the value.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Score screen.
Item
Setting
Lyrics
Sets whether or not the lyrics
appear in the music.
ON
The lyrics are displayed.
In some internal songs, the
fingering is displayed.
The fingering numbers shown
in the screen indicate one
possible fingering.
OFF
ON
Not displayed.
Finger Numbers
Whether or not the fingering
appears in the music.
The fingering is displayed.
Not displayed.
OFF
ON
Chords
Whether or not chord names
appear in the music.
The chord names are displayed.
Not displayed.
OFF
Chord names can be displayed
in some of the internal songs
and recorded performances
using the KF-7’s Chord
OFF
Not displayed.
C, D, E
The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed.
Pitches
Sets whether or not the note
names appear in the music
when the score is expanded.
Do, Re, Mi
(Fixed)
The pitch names (fixed Do) are displayed.
Do, Re, Mi
(Movable)
The syllable names (movable Do) are dis-
played.
Clef L
Auto
Display is switched automatically.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the score.
F (bass) clef is displayed in the score.
Display is switched automatically.
G (treble) clef is displayed in the score.
F (bass) clef is displayed in the score.
Key is switched automatically.
Determines whether a treble or
bass clef is shown in the score
for the left-hand part.
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
Clef R
Determines whether treble or
bass clef is shown in the score
for the right-hand part.
G Clef
F Clef
Auto
Key
Score is displayed in the
specified key.
b x 5–0–
# x 6
Score is displayed in the specified key.
7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Item
Setting
User Part
User Track,
Parts 1–16
Selects the part to display when “User” is selected as
the part to be displayed.
Lower Part
Lower Track,
Parts 1–16
Selects the part to display when “Lower” is selected as
the part to be displayed.
Upper Part
Upper Track,
Part 1–16
Selects the part to display when “Upper” is selected as
the part to be displayed.
● Sa vin g Sco re s a s Im a g e Da ta
You can take scores that are displayed on the KF-7 and save them to floppy disks.
N O TE
You can also use saved image data to your computer.
Other than for your own
personal enjoyment, use of the
scores that are output without
the permission of the
1 .
Insert the floppy disk onto which you want to save the image data in the
KF-7’s disk drive.
Use a floppy disk formatted on the KF-7.
copyright holder is prohibited
by law.
2 .
3 .
Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select a song.
Press the [Score Display] button.
The Score screen appears.
4 .
5 .
Touch <Option>.
Touch <Export>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-scorebmp.eps_60
6 .
7 .
Touch
for each parameter to set the range of the image data.
N O TE
Do not remove the floppy disk
while “save” is in progress.
Touch <Execute>.
The score is saved to the floppy disk as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.
.
7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Pra cticin g So n g s w ith th e Pra ctice
Fu n ctio n
Try using the KF-7’s practice function to practice a song you like.
This feature makes it simple to specify the segment you want for repeated practice,
check your own performance against the score, and practice at a slower tempo.
● 1 Disp la y in g th e Sco re Scre e n
Se le ctin g th e so n g
1 .
Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select the song you want to
practice.
Disp la y in g th e Sco re scre e n
2 .
3 .
Press the [Score Display] button.
The Score screen appears.
Touch <Tutor>.
The following “Tutor screen” appears.
fig.d-tutor1.eps_60
N O TE
When you select this function
after turning on the power, a
message screen like the one
shown in the figure at left
appears only once.
● 2 Pra cticin g
Liste n in g to a re fe re n ce o f th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
First, listen to the song you are going to practice.
Once you’re familiar with the song, practice it a number of times along with the
example.
1 .
2 .
Touch <Reference>.
When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.
Touch <
> on the screen.
The example performance is played back.
Touch <
Touch <
> or <
> to rewind or fast forward within the practice range.
> to return to the beginning of the practice range.
7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
When the Transpose function
tone is sounded when you
To u ch th e N o te s
When you touch a note on the Practice screen, the KF-7 plays that note.
touch notes or <One Note> on
the screen.
When you trace along the displayed score with your finger, the KF-7 plays the traced
segment.
O n e N o te
When you touch <
>, the KF-7 plays the note currently indicated by the
bouncing ball. When you touch <
at a time to check the notes.
> or <
>, you can return or advance one note
Re co rd in g Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce
Once you are able to play the song, try recording your own performance.
Changing the Performance
Played Back in the Check
Screen
3 .
4 .
Touch <Rec>.
When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.
You can switch the
performance that is played
back by touching the score for
“User” or “Reference” in the
Check screen.
Touch <
> on the screen.
You’ll hear a count, and recording begins.
Play along with the accompaniment.
When the keyboard is
displayed in the Check screen,
touch <User> or <Reference>
to switch the performance to
be played back.
Ch e ck in g Yo u r Pe rfo rm a n ce
Compare your recorded performance with the example.
5 .
6 .
Touch <Check>.
When the Message screen appears, touch <Close>.
Touch <
> on the screen.
The Check screen display compares the example performance with your own
performance.
Analyze and practice any trouble spots.
● 3 Ch a n g in g th e p ra ctice se ttin g s
Immediately after turning on the power, all measures are set for practice at the
original tempo.
In the beginning, you’ll probably want to select specific phrases, and practice that
material repeatedly at a slower tempo.
1 .
Touch <Options>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
fig.d-tutoropt.eps_60
Switch the screens
Parameter
Value
Description
Set
Left Hand,
Right Hand,
Both Hands
Part
Selects the part or parts to be practiced.
When the Transpose function
tone plays even if “Tone” is set
to “Do Re Mi.”
Specifies measures for practice.
Most of the KF-7’s internal songs have markers set in or-
der to make repeated practice easier. You can specify the
markers’ range by touching <Prev> or <Next>.
Range
Tempo
1–
Original Tempo,
A Little Slower,
Slower,
Selects the practice tempo.
Much Slower
When “On” is selected, song accompaniment parts are
also played back.
When “Quiet” is selected, song accompaniment parts are
played back at a lower volume.
When “Off” is selected, song accompaniment parts are
muted.
Accomp
Tone
On, Quiet, Off
Selects the tone played when the notes are touched.
When “Original” is selected, a original tone for the song is
selected.
When “Do Re Mi Voice” is selected, the notes are “sung”
as “Do-Re-Mi.”
Do Re Mi,
Original
Selects whether the score display or the keyboard display
is used in demonstrating the example performance and
your own recorded performance in the Check screen.
Check
2 .
Score, Keyboard
Touch the icon for the parameter you want to set.
The selections appear.
3 .
Touch the setting icon.
Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set each of the parameters.
Set the tempo, practice range and other variables to the values you prefer.
4 .
5 .
Touch <Audition>.
The practice range is played back using the selected settings.
Touch <Exit>.
You’re returned to the Practice screen.
7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o
This changes the song and Music Style tempos.
If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first
practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the
song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo.
Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the
tempo even when the song is in progress.
fig.panel3-2
Ad ju stin g th e te m p o w ith th e Te m p o [-] [+] b u tto n s
Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo increase continuously.
Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the
button makes the tempo decrease continuously.
Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song
to the basic tempo.
Ad ju stin g th e te m p o w ith th e d ia l
When the tempo is displayed at the upper-left area of the screen (except in the
adjust the tempo.
Turn the dial clockwise to speed up the tempo.
Turn the dial counterclockwise to slow the tempo.
7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Se ttin g th e Te m p o b y Pre ssin g th e Bu tto n in Tim e
(Ta p Te m p o )
You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called
“Tap Tempo.” By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you
are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms.
fig.panel3-3
Assig n in g fu n ctio n s to th e Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa d s
1 .
Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up.
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_60
You can also assign the Tap
Tempo function to the pedal,
and use the pedal to specify
the tempo. For details, refer to
“Assigning Functions to
(Pedal Setting/ User
2 .
3 .
Touch
for the Performance Pad to which the function is
assigned, then select “Tap Tempo.”
Touch <Exit>; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the screen.
Sp e cify in g th e Te m p o
Press the Pad to which “Tap Tempo” is assigned at least twice.
4 .
The tempo is set to the rhythm you used when tapping the button.
7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Use Yo u r Vo ice to Se le ct th e Te m p o
(Vo ca l Ta p Te m p o )
feature is called “Vocal Tap Tempo.”
Vocal Tap Tempo does not
function well when the mic
volume is too low. Adjust the
volume level with the Mic
[Volume] knob.
1 .
2 .
3 .
Press the [Metronome] button.
Touch <Vocal Tap>.
fig.d-vocaltap.eps_60
You can start the song by
giving the count through the
microphone. For more detailed
the start of songs and
with the sound of your voice
4 .
Count to four (“One, two, three, four”) into the mic.
The tempo is set to the beat you used speaking into the microphone. The new tempo
setting is indicated in the screen.
After setting the tempo, touch <Exit> and you’re returned to the Metronome screen.
● Pla y in g Ba ck a t a Fix e d Te m p o (Te m p o Mu te )
If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo.
Overriding tempo changes is called “Tempo Muting.”
1 .
Hold down the [
[+] buttons.
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video.
fig.d-tempmute.eps_60
When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo.
Ca n ce l th e te m p o m u te se ttin g
1 .
Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
[+] buttons.
Tempo muting is canceled.
Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song.
7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Ma tch th e Te m p o Be fo re Yo u Be g in
Pla y in g (Co u n t In )
When you’re playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start
playing by adding a count-in.
This audible count before the song playback is called a “Count-In.”
fig.panel3-3
1 .
2 .
Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up.
You can have a count sound be
played before the song starts
playing back by holding down
the [Reset] button while you
press the [Play/ Stop] button.
The status of the <Count In>
settings won’t be affected by
your use of this procedure.
If you are not using the metronome, press the [Metronome] button so its indicator
goes out.
Touch <Count In>.
The following “Count In settings screen” appears.
fig.d-cntin.eps_60
3 .
Touch <Switch>
to set this to “ON.”
With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts.
Ca n ce llin g th e Co u n t In
1 .
2 .
In the Metronome screen, touch <Count In>.
For more about other settings
on the Count-In settings
Touch <Switch>
to set this to “OFF.”
This sets the KF-7 so that the count sound is not played.
8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Mu tin g So m e Pa rts Be fo re Pla y in g
(Tra ck Bu tto n s)
With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can
For more on music files, refer
be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For
example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same
right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand
part plays.
A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below.
fig.trackbuttons.e
Drums/
SFX
Accom-
paniment
Left-hand Right-hand
Part
Part
By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is
referred to as “muting.”
If a single Track button
includes more than one
instrument and you want to
instruments, take a look at
By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can
1 .
Se le ctin g th e p a rt th a t y o u ’ll b e p la y in g
When a single Part is not
played, it is called “Minus
One.” Using Minus One, you
can mute out a particular
instrument and play the part
yourself.
2 .
Press any one of the Track buttons to make the button’s indicator light go
dark.
The sound for the selected part no longer plays.
For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/ Upper] button.
When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice
your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback.
When playing back SMF files
for Roland Piano Digital series
instruments, and the [3/
Pla y in g b a ck a so n g
Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
Lower] button and [4/ Upper]
button do not correctly control
the left/ right-hand
3 .
performances, please change
the “Track Assign” settings.
Parts Assigned to the Track
Buttons During SMF Playback
The song will begin playing back.
The part you selected in step 2 will not sound.
Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The button’s indicator will light
up, and the part will be heard once again.
Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute
the sound.
Sto p p in g th e so n g
You can adjust the balance
between the keyboard and
song volume levels. Check out
“Adjusting the Volume
4 .
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The song will stop.
8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Se ttin g Ma rk e rs fo r Re p e a te d Pra ctice
(Ma rk e r)
By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can
then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures.
● Pla cin g a Ma rk e r w ith in a So n g
You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song. These
markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of
a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same
place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even
while playback is in progress.
Acce ss th e Ma rk e r scre e n
1 .
2 .
Press the [Menu] button.
Touch
to switch the screens.
Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears.
fig.d-marker.eps_60
Pla cin g Ma rk e rs
3 .
4 .
Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [
and [ (Fwd)] buttons.
(Bwd)]
Touch <---> for Marker A.
Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.
“---” on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the
marker.
Markers can also be assigned
in units of beats rather than
5 .
In the same way, touch the Marker B <---> to set Marker B.
It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A.
8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Pla y b a ck fro m a Ma rk e r lo ca tio n
1 .
At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want
to go to.
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set.
With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker
B on the Marker screen.
● Era sin g a Ma rk e r
1 .
Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase.
fig.d-markclear.eps_60
The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <--->.
● Mo vin g a Ma rk e r
You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section
of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number
of measures of marked.
1 .
On the Marker screen, touch
or
for the marker to be moved.
fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60
When you touch
When you touch
, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song.
, the marker is moved to a later part of the song.
8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Mo vin g Ma rk e rs A a n d B w ith o ut ch a n g in g th e in te rva l b e tw e e n th e m
1 .
On the Marker screen, touch
or
in the middle of the screen.
For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and
Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch
A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and Marker B is moved to the
beginning of the fifth measure.
, Marker
Touch
to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B
to the beginning of the thirteenth measure.
fig.markerA-B.e
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
1 6
Measure
Marker A
Measure
Marker B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5
1 6
Marker A
Marker B
● Pla y in g Ba ck th e Sa m e Pa ssa g e O ve r a n d O ve r
You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you
want to focus on a passage.
1 .
First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to
repeat.
For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through
eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the
fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar.
fig.d-markrpt.eps_60
ON
OFF
When <Repeat> is On
• If neither Marker A nor
Marker B is set, the song is
played back from the
2 .
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen.
beginning to the end.
• If you only place marker A,
playback repeats from marker
A to the end of the song.
• If you only place marker B,
playback repeats from the
beginning of the song to
marker B.
The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B.
When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly.
Ca n ce llin g re p e a t p la y b a ck
3 .
Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, so it’s highlighted in black.
Repeat playback is cancelled.
8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
Tra n sp o sin g Ke y b o a rd So u n d s a n d
So n g s Pla y e d Ba ck (Tra n sp o se )
By using the “Transpose function,” you can transpose your performance without
changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with
many sharps ( ) or flats ( ), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to
read and play.
You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key.
When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is
comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same
fingering positions).
fig.panel3-4
1 .
Press the [Transpose] button.
A “Transpose screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-transpose.eps_60
2 .
Touch the Transpose icon.
Icon
Target
Settings Value
Keyboard sound
-6–0–+5
Song to be played back
-24–0–+24
-6–0–+5
Keyboard sounds, songs being played back
8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
3 .
Touch the screen keyboard or
value.
,
to select the transposition
Each time you press
When you touch
or
, it transposes the key by a semitone.
, a value of “0” is set.
You can also use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the transposition value.
When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] button’s indicator
lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed.
When you touch <Exit>, the transposition remains in effect, and you’re returned to
the previous screen.
Ca n ce llin g Tra n sp o sitio n
4 .
Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out.
The transposition value reverts
to “0” when you turn off the
power or select another song.
Transposition is cancelled.
The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music
is transposed by the value set here.
Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys
for C major
In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the
third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch
enter “4” for the setting.
, then
fig.trans.e
If you play C E G
It will sound E G#
B
8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
De ta ile d So n g Pla y b a ck Se ttin g s
● Ch a n g in g th e To n e Se ttin g s W h e n Pla y in g Ba ck
So n g s (Pla y Mo d e )
For detailed information about
With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are compatible with other GS
instruments) will normally be used to play back song data. By changing this setting,
you can play back song using KF-specific tones for certain portions of the data.
1 .
Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
fig.d-plymode.eps_60
Touch
to switch the screens.
2 .
Touch <Play Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-plymode.eps_60
3 .
Touch the icon to choose the setting.
Icon
Description
Playback uses GS-compatible tones for performances that sound like
other GS instruments.
GS
KF
Playback uses KF tones for greater expressiveness. However, differ-
ences may appear when playing back using devices other than the
KF.
4 .
5 .
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Menu screen.
After changing this setting, try selecting the song once again.
8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Hid in g th e Ly rics (Ly rics)
Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke, as well as some of the
internal songs include lyrics data. When you play such music files, the lyrics
automatically appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear automatically,
set this to “OFF.”
1 .
2 .
Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
Touch
to switch the screens.
Touch <Lyrics>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lyric.eps_60
Even when this is set to “OFF,”
you can still have the lyrics be
displayed by touching <lyrics>
when it appears in the Piano or
3 .
4 .
Touch
to select the setting.
The screen may be switched
when you press the button
while the Lyrics screen is
displayed. To have the lyrics
displayed again, touch
Display
Explanation
Lyrics are displayed automatically (when performance data con-
taining lyrics is played back).
ON
<lyrics> on the Piano or Basic
screen, or stop playback of the
Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song data being played back
contains lyrics data.
OFF
song, then press the [
(Play/ Stop)] button.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 3 So n g Pla y b a ck a n d Pra ctice Fu n ctio n s
● Ch a n g in g th e Pa rts Assig n e d to th e Tra ck
Bu tto n s Du rin g SMF Pla y b a ck (Tra ck Assig n )
left-hand part is assigned to the [3/ Lower] button, and the right-hand part is
assigned to the [4/ Upper] button. However, assignment of the right-hand and left-
hand parts may differ with some SMF data.
When you select this parameter,
the message “OK to delete
song?” may be displayed. Refer
If you cannot get the right-hand and left-hand parts to work well set on “Auto,” then
change the setting to “2/ 1 Part” or “3/ 4 Part.”
1 .
2 .
Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
This setting is effective with
SMF format song data.
This is not effective with the
internal songs.
Touch
to switch the screens.
Touch <Track Assign>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-trkasgn.eps_60
3 .
4 .
Touch
to select the setting.
Display
Explanation
The part assigned to each track will be determined automatically,
depending on the song data.
Auto
Part 1 will be assigned to the right-hand track, part 2 to the left-hand
track, and part 3 to the user track.
2/1 Part
3/4 Part
Part 4 will be assigned to the right-hand track, part 3 to the left-hand
track, and part 1 to the user track.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
After changing this setting, try selecting the song once again.
8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
With the KF-7, you can easily record performances using the five track buttons.
A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add
N O TE
additional parts.
Recorded performances are
discarded when another song
is selected, or when the power
is turned off. Be sure to save
important performances on a
floppy disk. Take a look at
You can use the KF-7 to make the following kinds of recordings.
•
•
•
•
Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment
Recording along with the internal songs and songs on disks
● If th e fo llo w in g scre e n a p p e a rs
message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song.
If it’s okay to delete the song, touch <OK>.
If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song to a
9 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g a N e w So n g (N e w So n g )
This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or
Automatic Accompaniment.
fig.panel4-1
Se ttin g s fo r re co rd in g p e rfo rm a n ce s
1 .
2 .
Press One Touch Program [Piano] button.
Decide on the tone of the performance.
Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone.
When you have finished choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic
screen.
Re co rd in g se ttin g s
3 .
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
You press the [
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
If you select <New Song>
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
Touch <New Song>.
This switches the KF-7 to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
4 .
Decide on the tempo and beat.
If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome.
When you have finished making the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic
screen.
Sta rt re co rd in g
Press the [
5 .
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/ Stop)] button, recording starts when you
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than
pushing the [
(Play/ Stop)] button.
9 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
When recording starts, the [
light up.
(Play/ Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons’ indicators
N O TE
Sto p re co rd in g
Any performance that has
been recorded is deleted when
the power to the KF-7 is turned
off. If you do not want a
performance deleted, then
save it to a floppy disk or to
6 .
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
The performance is recorded to the [1/ Whole] button.
Liste n in g to th e Re co rd e d Pe rfo rm a n ce
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [
7 .
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/ Stop)] button, playback stops.
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances
When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to
the track buttons as follows.
•
•
•
Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard)
The performance is recorded to the [1/ Whole] button.
Layer performance
The performance is recorded to the [1/ Whole] button.
Split performance
The left-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/ Lower] button, and the
right-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/ Upper] button.
•
•
Layer performance and Split performance
The left-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/ Lower] button, and layer
performance in the right-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/ Upper]
button.
Drum set or sound effect performance
Recorded on the [R/ Rhythm] button.
9 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g W ith Acco m p a n im e n t
Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment.
Se ttin g s fo r re co rd in g p e rfo rm a n ce s
1 .
2 .
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button.
This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment.
Decide on the Music Style.
When you have finished choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic screen.
Re co rd in g Se ttin g s
3 .
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
You press the [
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a
song has already been recorded.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
If you select <New Song>
when a song has already been
recorded, the “OK to delete
song?” prompt appears in the
screen. For more detailed
Touch <New Song>.
This switches the KF-7 to the settings required for recording a new song.
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
4 .
Decide on the tempo.
Sta rt re co rd in g
5 .
Play a chord on the left-hand part of the keyboard.
You can change how recording
is stopped when recording a
performance with Automatic
Accompaniment. To learn
An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time.
Sto p re co rd in g
Press the [Intro/Ending] button.
6 .
An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the
same time.
Liste n in g to th e re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce
Press the [ (Reset)] button, then press the [
7 .
(Play/Stop)] button.
The recorded performance plays back.
When you press the [ (Play/ Stop)] button, playback stops.
9 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Track buttons assignments for recorded performances
Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are
assigned to the track buttons as shown below.
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
Performance Recorded
The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is
recorded here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds
that are selected with the keys in a performance are re-
corded to this track.
performance played on the keyboard is recorded here.
[1/Whole]
[2/ Bass
Accomp]
The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and
accompaniment part are recorded here.
When the KF-7 is set so that sounds from performances on
the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the
performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is re-
corded here.
[3/Lower]
[4/Upper]
Your own performance on the right-hand side of the
keyboard is recorded here.
Music Styles are composed of
five parts. For details, refer to
9 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Re co rd in g Alo n g w ith a So n g
Try recording along with internal songs and songs on disks.
Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment.
Se ttin g s fo r re co rd in g p e rfo rm a n ce s
Select a song before you begin recording.
When you have selected the song, press the [Score Display] button to display the score.
1 .
Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance.
After choosing the settings, touch <Exit> to display the Basic screen.
The song tempo is stored
within the song you selected.
Re co rd in g se ttin g s
Press the [ (Rec)] button.
2 .
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
3 .
Touch <Add On>.
With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song.
Se le ctin g th e tra ck to re co rd
4 .
Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track
that you want to play yourself).
N O TE
The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KF-7 enters recording-
standby mode.
Only drum sets or SFX set are
recorded to the [R/ Rhythm]
button.
Since in this example we will record the right-hand performance, press the [4/
Upper] button to make the button’s indicator light blink.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
Sta rt re co rd in g
Press the [
5 .
(Play/Stop)] button.
A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts.
Even without pressing the [
(Play/ Stop)] button, recording starts when you
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the
keyboard instead of pushing the [
(Play/ Stop)] button.
(Play/ Stop)] and [ (Rec)] buttons’ indicators light.
When recording starts, the [
Sto p re co rd in g
6 .
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recording stops.
9 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Liste n in g to th e re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce
7 .
Press the [
(Reset)] button, then press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
Recorded performances are
The recorded performance is played back.
When you press the [ (Play/ Stop)] button, recording stops.
recorded to <0: (Song Name)>.
Re co rd in g W h ile Se le ctin g th e Tra ck
Bu tto n s (Re d o in g Re co rd in g s)
When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want
to re-record, and then record again.
When you want to record over
again after deleting all of the
previous recording, refer to
When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from
the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will
be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance.
1 .
2 .
Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure
where you want to begin recording.
Press the [
(Rec)] button.
The song tempo is stored
within the song you selected. If
you want to change the tempo
of the recorded song, refer to
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-rec.eps_60
3 .
4 .
Touch <Add on>.
Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record.
The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking.
The [
(Play/ Stop)] button’s indicator flashes, and the KF-7 is put in recording
standby.
To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
5 .
6 .
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording.
Re re co rd in g th e a cco m p a n im e n t p a rt o f a u to m a tic
a cco m p a n im e n t
Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording.
If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the
[Intro/ Ending] button.
9 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Era sin g Re co rd e d Pe rfo rm a n ce s
You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance.
1 .
Hold down the [Select/Listen to a Song] button and press the [
button.
(Rec)]
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-songdel.eps_60
2 .
Touch <OK>.
This deletes the recorded song.
When you touch <Cancel>, the previous screen appears and the recorded song is not
erased.
● Era sin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce o n Sp e cific Tra ck s
You can select and erase performances on specific tracks.
1 .
Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance
you want to erase, then press the [ (Rec)] button.
The Track button’s light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased.
Ch a n g in g Ho w Re co rd in g Sto p s
When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the
accompaniment and the way recording mode stops.
1 .
2 .
Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
The Menu screen appears.
Touch <Rec Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_60
9 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
3 .
Touch <Rec Stop>
“Composer Stop.”
to switch between “Arranger Stop” and
Display
Explanation
Recording stops at the same time the Automatic Accompani-
ment stops.
Arranger Stop
Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic Accompa-
Composer Stop
niment stops. When you press the [
ton, recording stops.
(Play/ Stop)] but-
Re co rd in g So n g s Sta rtin g w ith Pick u p s
You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other
than the measure’s first beat).
fig.PU.e
~
Measure
-2
PU
1
Recording begins here
If the [ (Rec)] button’s indicator is not lit, press the [
(Rec)] button so the
indicator is lit.
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
1 .
Press the [
(Bwd)] button one time.
The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to “PU,” and the
KF-7 is set to record a song starting with a pickup.
fig.d-pu.eps_60
Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins.
9 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Usin g Flo p p y Disk s
You can use the KF-7’s disk drive to save songs to floppy disks and listen to
commercial music files.
If you’re using the disk drive
for the first time, be sure to
read the important notes on
p. 6.
● In se rtin g a n d Eje ctin g a Flo p p y Disk
In se rtin g a flo p p y d isk
1 .
With the front of the floppy disk facing up, insert the disk in the disk
drive slot until there is an audible click.
N O TE
fig.diskdrive.e
Never remove the disk while
it is being read or written.
Doing so will scratch the
magnetic surface of the disk,
making it unusable. (The
disk drive indicator will light
brightly while data is being
read or written. Normally, it
will be lit dimly or will be
dark.)
Indicator
Eject Button
Floppy Disk
Re m o vin g a flo p p y d isk
Press the Eject button.
2 .
N O TE
The end of the floppy disk comes out of the slot. Grasp the edge of the floppy disk
and gently pull it out.
When a floppy disk is
initialized, all of the data
saved on the disk is erased.
If you’re formatting a used
floppy disk for reuse, be
sure to check first to make
sure the disk doesn’t contain
any data you don’t want to
lose.
● Fo rm a ttin g Flo p p y Disk s (Fo rm a t)
A newly purchased floppy disk, or a floppy disk that has been used by another
device cannot be used as is. Such floppy disks must be “formatted” (initialized) for
use with the KF-7.
If a floppy disk is in a format that doesn’t match the format of this unit, you won’t be
able to use that floppy disk.
fig.panel4-3
First make sure that the protect tab of the floppy disk is in the “Write (write enable)”
position.
fig.DiskProtect.e
Rear side of the disk
Write
(can write new data onto disk)
Write Protect Tab
Protect
(prevents writing to disk)
9 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
1 .
2 .
3 .
Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
Press the [Disk] button.
Touch <File>.
A “Song File screen” like the one below appears.
fig.d-songfile.eps_60
4 .
Touch <Format Disk>.
The following screen appears.
fig.d-format.eps_60
N O TE
Don’t try to take the floppy
disk out of the disk drive until
the formatting process is
finished.
5 .
Touch <OK>.
N O TE
If “Error” appears on screen,
Initialization of the disk begins.
Touch <Cancel> to go back to the previous screen.
When initialization is completed, you’re returned to the previous screen.
1 0 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Sa vin g So n g s
A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose
another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to floppy disks or the
Favorites is called “saving.” Be sure to save important songs to floppy disks or
Favorites.
When using a new floppy disk,
first initialize (format) the disk
on the KF-7. Take a look at
W h a t a re “ Fa vo rite s? ”
You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to
On the KF-7, when you register a song on a floppy disk to Favorites, you can then
play back the song without inserting the floppy disk in the disk drive.
If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance won’t be erased
when the power is turned off.
N O TE
Some commercially available
music files cannot be saved
because they are copy
protected.
Pre p a ra tio n s fo r Sa vin g Da ta
When saving to floppy disks, first check to make sure that the floppy disk’s protect
1 .
2 .
3 .
Press the [Disk] button.
Touch <File>.
If not handled with care, a
floppy disk can be damaged,
or the data on it become
corrupted, making playback
impossible. We recommend
saving your songs on two
different floppy disks.
Touch <Save>.
The following “Save Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songsave.eps_60
When you want to clear all of
the content saved to the
“Favorites” and restore the
settings to the original factory
1 0 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
De te rm in in g th e n a m e o f th e so n g to b e sa ve d
4 .
Touch <Rename>.
The following “Rename screen” appears.
fig.d-songname.eps_60
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears
at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group (“A”→”B”→”C”...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through “English (upper case),”
“English (lower case),” “numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position.
5 .
When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.
De te rm in in g th e Sa ve De stin a tio n
6 .
7 .
Touch <Disk> or <Favorites>.
Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch <Favorites> if you are saving
to Favorites.
Touch
to select the save-destination song number.
If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new
song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved
song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column.
1 0 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Se le ctin g th e to n e co m p a tib ility fo rm a t (w h e n sa vin g to d isk s)
8 .
Touch <KF> or <MT>.
Some Tones are unique to the KF-7. Data that is recorded using these tones may not
play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you want
to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with
“MT” set as the Tone compatibility format.
Display
KF
Explanation
The song is saved as data capable of reproducing performances with
richness of expression using the KF-7’s special Tones.
Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital
Pianos or Music Players other than the KF-7.
MT
You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/ R se-
ries, KR series and KF series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series
devices.
<N o te >
When data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this
instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the
data was recorded may be altered.
Even with data saved with “MT” as the Tone compatibility format, an exact
reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS
devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players.
Sa ve
N O TE
9 .
Touch <Save> or <As SMF> to start saving.
You can only save songs in one
format on a single floppy disk.
The resulting file format will be different depending on whether <Save> or <As
SMF> is chosen, as described below.
N O TE
Never turn off the power
Display
Explanation
while the saving operation is
in progress. Doing so will
damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
Saves the song in KF-7 format. You can listen to songs saved in
this format on the Roland HP-G/ R series, KR series and KF series
keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices. This format is
called “i-format”.
Save
Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved in
this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments that can
A song recorded using commercial music files can’t be saved in
“Save As SMF” format for reasons of copyright protection.
It’s a good idea to get into the
habit of moving the write-
protect tab on the floppy disk
to the “Protect” position when
you’ve finished saving your
data. Keeping the tab at
Save As SMF
The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more.
Don’t take the floppy disk out of the disk drive until the saving process is finished.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Song File screen.
“Protect” prevents operations
that could erase your songs by
mistake.
N O TE
Depending on the playback
instrument, some notes may
drop out or sound different.
1 0 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
De le tin g Sa ve d So n g s
This deletes songs that have been saved on floppy disks, or to Favorites.
To delete a song on a floppy disk, first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.
1 .
2 .
Press the [Disk] button.
Touch <File>.
The “Song File screen” appears.
3 .
Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songdel.eps_60
4 .
Touch <Disk> or <Favorites>.
Touch <Disk> if you are deleting a song from a floppy disk; touch <Favorites> if you
are deleting a song from Favorites.
5 .
6 .
Touch
to select the song to be deleted.
Touch <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.m-filedel.eps_60
N O TE
7 .
Touch <OK>.
Never turn off the power
while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will
damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
The selected song is deleted.
Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the operation is finished.
Touching <Cancel> cancels the operation.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Song File screen.
1 0 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
Co p y in g So n g s o n Disk s to Fa vo rite s
You can take songs saved on floppy disks and copy them to Favorites.
You can also copy songs in Favorites to floppy disks.
1 .
2 .
3 .
4 .
Insert the disk with the song to be copied in the disk drive.
Press the [Disk] button.
Touch <File>.
Touch <Copy>.
The following “Copy Song screen” appears.
fig.d-songcopy.eps_60
Sp e cify in g th e Co p y So u rce
5 .
Touch the <Disk>
to select the song you want to copy.
When “Copy All” is selected, all of the songs on the disk are copied to Favorites.
Sp e cify in g th e Co p y De stin a tio n
6 .
Touch <Favorites>
to select the copy destination for the song.
If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number.
If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that
location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you don’t want to erase a
previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the
destination column.
N O TE
Never turn off the power
while the operation is in
progress. Doing so will
damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
7 .
Touch <Execute>.
Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive until the copy is finished.
The song from the disk is copied to Favorites.
1 0 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 4 Re co rd in g a n d Sa vin g th e Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Co p y in g So n g s Sa ve d in Fa vo rite s to Disk s
Songs that’ve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto floppy disks.
In this case, in the “Copy Song screen” in Step 4 above, touch the large arrow icon in
the center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KF-7 to copy the song in
Favorites to the floppy disk.
fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from floppy
disks to Favorites.
Some song data cannot copy
because they are copy
protected.
1 0 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Use r Pro g ra m Re g istra tio n
De te rm in in g th e n a m e o f th e Use r Pro g ra m s
Sa vin g Pe rfo rm a n ce Se ttin g s
(Use r Pro g ra m )
4 . Touch <Rename>.
A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-upgname.eps_50
Any collection of settings, including those describing the
current status of your data selections or settings Automatic
Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button.
You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User
Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of
Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used
settings, makes it more convenient.
You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KF-7.
fig.panel_UPG
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears of the cursor potion.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
● For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
1 . Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the
settings are the way you want them.
2 . Press the [User Program] button.
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
A “User Program screen” like the one shown below
appears.
fig.d-upg.eps_50
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
5 . When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.
You’re returned to the Write User Program screen.
De te rm in in g th e w rite d e stin a tio n
6 . Touch
number.
to select the write-destination
7 . Touch <Write>.
3 . Touch <Write>.
The confirmation message appears.
A “Write User Program screen” like the following
8 . Touch <OK>.
appears.
fig.d-upgwrite.eps_50
The current performance settings are saved to the [User
Program] button.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
● You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]
1 0 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Use r Pro g ra m Re g istra tio n
Ca llin g Up Sa ve d Use r
Pro g ra m s
Usin g th e Pe d a l to Sw itch
Use r Pro g ra m s
You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program]
button.
You ca use the Pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User
Programs in order.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
The “User Program screen” appears.
2 . Touch <Option> in the lower part of the screen.
2 . Touch the name of the User Program you want to call
3 . Touch
following.
to display screen like the
up.
When you touch the name of the User Program, the
buttons or other performance settings instantly change
to the previously saved settings.
fig.d-upgsave.eps_50
● Ch a n g in g th e W a y Use r
Pro g ra m s Are Ca lle d Up
When calling up User Programs, you can prevent the settings
for Automatic Accompaniment from switching by not
touching the touch screen for a few moments.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
2 . Touch <Option> in the lower part of the screen.
A settings screen like the following appears.
fig.d-upgopt.eps_50
4 . Touch
to select the setting.
Display
Off
Explanation
You can use a function assigned to the pedal.
The soft pedal is dedicated to switching
Soft Pedal User Programs.The function assigned to the
soft pedal cannot be used.
The sostenuto pedal is dedicated to switch-
Sostenuto
ing User Programs.The function assigned to
Pedal
the sostenuto pedal cannot be used.
3 . Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting.
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.
Display
Instant
Explanation
Immediately after a User Program name is
touched, the Automatic Accompaniment
settings also switch.
The Automatic Accompaniment settings
switch after you touch and road the User
Program name for a few moments.
Delayed
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program screen.
1 0 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Use r Pro g ra m Re g istra tio n
De te rm in in g th e sa ve d e stin a tio n
Sa vin g th e Use r Pro g ra m
Se ts
6 . Touch <Disk> or <User>.
Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch
<User> if you are saving to user memory.
You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the [User
Program] button and save them as a set to a floppy disk, or to
user memory.
7 . Touch
Program number.
to select the save-destination User
When saving to a floppy disk, first insert a floppy disk in the
disk drive.
If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program
set saved to that saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with previously saved User
Program set data, then save a new set of data to that
same number, the older User Program set will be
deleted. If you don’t want to lose any previously saved
User Programs, select a number in the save-destination
column that does not yet have a name.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
2 . Touch <File>.
3 . Touch <Save>.
A “Save User Program screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgsave.eps_50
Sa ve
8 . Touch <Save> to begin the save.
Touch <Exit> to return to the User Program File screen.
* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage
the KF-7’s internal memory, making it unusable.
● When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to
Givin g a n a m e to a se t o f Use r Pro g ra m s
4 . Touch <Rename>.
The Rename screen appears.
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position. For example
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you
through the available choices in that character group
(A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
5 . When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.
1 0 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Use r Pro g ra m Re g istra tio n
● Lo a d in g Sa ve d Use r Pro g ra m
De le tin g Sa ve d Use r
Pro g ra m Se ts
Se ts
User Programs that have been saved on floppy disks or in
user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis, to
the [User Program] button.
You can delete individual User Program sets saved to floppy
disks or in user memory.
When deleting a set of User Programs on a floppy disk, first
insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.
* Note that calling up these User Programs results in the
deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the [User
Program] button.
When loading a set of User Programs from a floppy disk,
first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
2 . Touch <File>.
3 . Touch <Delete>.
1 . Press the [User Program] button.
2 . Touch <File>.
A “Delete User Program screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgdel.eps_50
3 . Touch <Load>.
A “Load User Program screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgload.eps_50
4 . Touch <Disk> or <User>.
Touch <Disk> if you are deleting User Programs from a
floppy disk; touch <User> if you are deleting User
Programs from the user memory.
Sp e cify in g th e se t o f Use r Pro g ra m s to b e
lo a d e d
5 . Touch
be deleted.
to select the set of User Programs to
4 . Touch <
(Disk)> or <
(User)>.
6 . Touch <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
Touch <
> if you are loading User Programs from a
floppy disk; touch <
> if you are loading User
fig.msg_filedel
Programs from the user memory.
5 . Touch the name of User Program to load.
6 . Touch <Load>.
The confirmation message appears.
7 . Touch <OK>.
7 . Touch <OK>.
The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User
Program] button.
The selected User Programs are deleted.
Touching <Cancel> cancels deleting the file.
* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage
the KF-7’s internal memory, making it unusable.
* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage
the KF-7’s internal memory, making it unusable.
1 1 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Use r Pro g ra m Re g istra tio n
● Co p in g Se ts o f Use r Pro g ra m s
Sto re d in th e Use r Me m o ry to
Disk s
Co p y in g Se ts o f Use r
Pro g ra m s o n Disk s to th e
Use r Me m o ry
You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and
You can copy sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks
and to user memory.
copy them to floppy disks.
In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4
above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the
arrow to point up. This sets the KF-7 to copy the User
Program set in the user memory to the floppy disk.
You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user
memory and to floppy disks.
1 . Insert the disk with the settings to be copied in the disk
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
sets of User Program set from disks to user memory.
drive.
2 . Touch the [User Program] button.
3 . Touch <File>.
4 . Touch <Copy>.
A “Copy User Programs screen” like the following
appears.
fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50
Sp e cify in g th e co p y so u rce
5 . Touch <Disk>
to select the set of User
Programs you want to copy.
When “All” is selected, all of the sets of User Programs
on the disk are copied to user memory.
Sp e cify in g th e co p y d e stin a tio n
6 . Touch <User>
to select the copy destination
for the set of User Programs.
If a User Program name is displayed, already a User
Program saved to that number is already.
If you select a number with User Programs data, and
then copy data to that number, the previously saved
User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete
the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-
destination column for which no name is displayed.
7 . Touch <Execute>.
The set of User Programs on the disk is saved to user memory.
* Never turn off the power or eject the floppy disk from the disk
drive while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage
the KF-7’s internal memory, making it unusable.
1 1 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 5 Use r Pro g ra m Re g istra tio n
● Sim u lta n e o u sly Sw itch in g Use r
Pro g ra m a n d Tra n sm ittin g PC
N u m b e rs
You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted
to an external MIDI device when you switch the User
Program on the KF-7.
You can register PC number settings to each of the User
Programs, just as you can with button settings and other
settings preferences.
Ca llin g Up th e Pe rfo rm a n ce Se ttin g s to Be Se t
1 . Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name
of the performance setting you want to set.
Se ttin g th e Tra n sm issio n o f th e PC
2 . Touch <PC Set> in the User Program screen.
The following type of screen appears.
fig-upgPCset.eps_50
3 . Touch
for the parameter and make the settings.
Description
Display
This prevents the PC number from being
transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission
channel (Channel 1–16).
Tx PC
Channel
Bank
Select LSB
Sets the Bank Select LSB.
Sets the Bank Select MSB.
Bank
Select MSB
Program
Change
Sets the Program Change messages (Pro-
gram Numbers).
4 . Touch <Exit>.
The User Program screen returns to the display.
Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program.
1 1 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
Co m m e rcia lly Ava ila b le Mu sic File s
Commercially available song file recorded in Roland’s SMF
Mu ltitra ck Re co rd in g w ith 1 6
Pa rts (1 6 -Tra ck Se q u e n ce r)
format is also composed of sixteen parts.
By loading the song file from the floppy disk and using the
Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously
16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file.
recorded material while continuing to add performances of
● Although with commercially available Roland SMF music
data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button,
other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.
other parts.
The KF-7 is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen
parts. Since each part’s performance is recorded using one
tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones
for the data in one song. The function used to layer these
* With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit
the data.
sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the “16-Track Sequencer.”
fig.16track.e
● Th e 1 6 -Tra ck Se q u e n ce r Scre e n
1 6 -Tra ck Se q u e n ce r
You can record performances for up to 16 parts,
overlaying them part by part, to create a single song.
When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
track Sequencer screen.
Part 1
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
Flute Part
Part 2
Part 3
Part 4
Bass Part
The Menu screen appears.
Piano Part (left hand)
Piano Part (right hand)
2 . Touch <16trk Sequencer>.
•
•
•
A “16-track Sequencer screen” like the one shown below
Part 16
appears.
fig.d-16tr.eps_50
1 6 -Tra ck Se q u e n ce r a n d Tra ck Bu tto n s
In addition to the “16-Track Sequencer” function, the “Track
functions.
These five “Track buttons” are used for organizing the 16-
Track Sequencer’s sixteen parts. This allows you to use the
16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances
recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more
detailed edits of the songs.
You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-
Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons,
and more.
Icon
Description
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the
part whose settings are to be changed. The
Part you choose appears is highlighted.
The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as
shown below.
<1>-
<16>
Track button
[R/Rhythm]
[1/Whole]
Part
This Part to be played back
D (10), S (11)
1
The Part not to be played back (Muted Part)
[2/Bass Accomp]
[3/Lower]
2, 5–9, 12–16
3
4
Parts that do not have performance data re-
corded to them.
[4/Upper]
Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part,
simultaneously. Also, you can’t record the performance with
Automatic Accompaniment.
Solo
Mute
Only the selected Part is played back.
This allows you to prevent the sound for the
selected part from playing.
The performance data for the selected part is
deleted.
Clear
When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment,
then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer
This displays the Part Settings screen, in
which you can make detailed settings for each
Options
1 1 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
Icon
Description
4 . Touch
the setting.
for the corresponding item to change
The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer
Tone Set
You can also change the values by touching each
parameter slider and then using the [-] [+] buttons and
the dial.
● Mo d ify in g th e Se ttin g s o f Ea ch Pa rt
You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the
playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the
16-track Sequencer and the internal songs.
Display
Description
● Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are
also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the
individual Parts and play them back in the same way.
Volume
Reverb
Chorus
Changes the volume level.
Changes the amount of reverb effect
applied to the sound.
First, select the song for which the settings are to be made
Changes the amount of chorus applied.
Shifts the direction from which the sound is
heard between left and right.
2 . Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want
Panpot
Touch
to shift the sound to the right,
to shift it to the left.
to make settings.
or touch
Change the settings for the selected Part.
Display
Solo
Function
W h a t’s Pa n p o t?
Panpot is the control that determines the placement of
the sound in the stereo sound field between left and
right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can
change the perceived location of the sound between the
left and right speakers.
Only the selected Part is played back.
Toggles playback of the selected Part to on
or off.
Mute
Clear
The performance data for the selected part is
deleted.
* When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the
deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If
you don’t want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>.
Once a performance has been erased, it can’t be restored.
When you press the [
(Play/ Stop)] button, you
hear what the song sounds like as you change the
settings. When you press the [
(Play/ Stop)]
button, playback of the song stops.
3 . Touch <Options> to make more detailed settings for
5 . Touch
to make settings for other parts.
the selected part.
The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen.
Change the settings for other parts as needed.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16trpart.eps_50
6 . Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the [
(Reset)] button.
This operation set the changes in the settings.
The song can then be saved to a floppy disk or to user
memory.
If you do not want to delete a song after changing the
settings for the individual parts, save the song to a
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed.
When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>
to select the drum set or effect sound.
* You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds
for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute).
The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of
the screen.
1 1 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
If th e fo llo w in g m e ssa g e a p p e a rs
● Re co rd in g a Pe rfo rm a n ce
● Ste p 1 Pre p a re fo r Re co rd in g
Se le ctin g th e so n g to re co rd
If you try to display another screen after you’ve changed the
song’s settings for each Part, a message like the one below
may appear.
fig.m-songmod.eps
1 . Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button.
2 . Touch the genre of the song you’re recording.
When recording a new song, try recording to
“Favorites.”
3 . Select the song number to which you want to record.
If recording a new song, touch <0: (Song Name)> to
Touch <OK> to change the song’s settings.
select <0: New Song>.
fig.d-songnew.eps_50
Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes you’re made.
● Ge ttin g th e Mo st Su ita b le Pa rt
To n e s fo r th e Mu sica l Ge n re
(To n e Se t)
“Tone Set” is a function that automatically assigns the most
suitable tones for the selected musical style.
When you’re creating a song, you can assign Tone sets, then
change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song.
● If a song has already been recorded, or if the song’s settings
have been changed, the “OK to delete Song?” confirmation
prompt appears when you touch <0: (Song Name)>. For more
2 . Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-16trtone.eps_50
De te rm in in g th e so n g ’s b e a t a n d te m p o
● You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. If you
want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through
5 . Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic
3 . Touch the screen to select a musical genre.
tempo of the song.
4 . Touch <Exit>.
If you do not need the metronome sound, press the
[Metronome] button once more.
The 16-track Sequencer screen appears.
Tones for each part are assigned automatically.
● When using song data that has already been recorded, the
recording is made using the source song’s basic tempo. To
* In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned.
1 1 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● Ste p 2 Sta rt Re co rd in g
Ch a n g in g th e Re co rd in g
Me th o d (Re c Mo d e )
If necessary, choose a recording method.
If you record for the first time, there’s no need to select the
recording method.
You can use any of the four methods below to record with
the KF-7.
Although you will normally be using “Replace Recording,”
where previously recorded material is erased when new
sounds are recorded, you’ll find that you can record songs
easily by using this method in combination with other
recording methods.
Se le ctin g th e Pa rt to Re co rd
2 . Touch the number for the Part you want to record.
The Part you touch appears in reverse video.
You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on
Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or
effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and
touching <Drum Set>.
This is the normal method for recording. New material is
recorded as previously recorded material is erased.
Se le ctin g th e so u n d to p la y
New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded.
3 . Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play.
This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record
melodies over prerecorded accompaniment.
After selecting a Tone, touch <Exit> to call up the “16-
Track Sequencer screen.”
Re co rd in g th e p e rfo rm a n ce
Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes
are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for
creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record
over and over within a selected segment, adding a different
percussion sound with each pass.
4 . Press the [
(Reset)] button.
Recording will start at the beginning of the song.
If you want to record from a point other than the
beginning, use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)]
buttons to select another measure to begin.
5 . Press the [
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a
recorded performance.
light up.
● Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
6 . Press the [ (Play/Stop)] button.
selected.
A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
* You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the
16-track sequencer.
7 . Press the [
Recording stops.
(Play/Stop)] button.
When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and
recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish
recording the song.
● You only need to follow the procedure described in “Step 1 –
Prepare for Recording” when you’re recording the first Part.
For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed
from “Step 2 Start Recording.”
* Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the
power to the KF-7 is turned off. It is a good idea to save song
data to a floppy disk or user memory. For more information,
1 1 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
Ch a n g in g th e Re co rd in g Me th o d
● Re co rd in g W h ile Era sin g th e
Pre vio u s Re co rd in g (Re p la ce
Re co rd in g )
The recording process where previous material is erased as
new material is recorded is called “replace recording.” This
setting is in effect when you turn on the power.
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
fig.d-menu1.eps_50
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
The KF-7 is set to the replace recording mode.
Record the performance using the procedures described
2 . Touch <Rec Mode>.
A “Rec Mode screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-recmode.eps_50
● La y e rin g a Re co rd in g O ve r
Pre vio u sly Re co rd e d So u n d s
(Mix Re co rd in g )
You can record a performance layered over a previously
recorded performance. This method is called “Mix
Recording.”
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
Record the performance using the procedures described
methods.
3 . Touch <Rec Mode>
to select the recording
mode.
* After you have finished with mix recording, return to the
usual replace recording mode.
Display
Replace
Mix
Recording Method
Replace Recording
Mix Recording
Loop
Loop Recording
Auto Punch-
In/Out
Punch-in recording of the interval
between set markers
Punch-in recording starting from the
point at which the pedal, the
Manual
Punch-In/Out
Performance Pad or the [
ton is pressed
(Rec)] but-
For more about Punch In Recording,
You can add tempo changes to a
Tempo
4 . Touch <Exit>.
Returns to the Menu screen.
1 1 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
5 . Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to begin
● Rep ea ted Record ing a t the
recording.
Sa m e Loca tion (Loop Record ing )
You can record a specified passage over and over, layering
sounds with each pass. This method is called “Loop
Recording.” This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part.
Recording starts from Marker A.
When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to
Marker A, where recording continues.
For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a
four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare
drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different
instrument onto the same four measures. After you have
finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can
need to complete your Rhythm part.
Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are
layered over previously recorded sounds.
6 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
recording stops.
* After you have finished with loop recording, return to the
1 . Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the
Lo o p Re co rd in g Sh o rtcu t
passage you want to record.
You can also use the method described below to set Loop
Recording.
1 . Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then use “Blank
Recording” to create the necessary number of measures
before placing the markers.
the passage you want to record.
If you haven’t recorded anything yet, then perform
“Blank Recording” for the necessary number of
measures before placing the markers.
W h a t is Bla n k Re co rd in g ?
Blank Recording is recording a number of silent
measures with no content.
2 . Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen
1 . Set the basic tempo and beat of the song.
2 . Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the
This sets the loop recording mode.
Start a recording.
[
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [
(Rec)] and [
(Play/
* After you have finished with loop recording, touch the
<Repeat> icon in the “Marker screen” once more to
return to the usual replace recording mode.
Stop)] buttons both light up, and recording starts.
3 . Without performing anything, record only the
required number of measures, then press the
[
(Play/Stop)] button.
The indicators for the [ (Rec)] and [
(Play/
Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.
Touch <Exit> to return to the menu screen.
The recording method changes to loop recording.
3 . Press the [
(Rec)] button.
4 . Press the Track button for the track to be recorded.
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
1 1 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
3 . Begin recording.
● Re -Re co rd in g Pa rt o f Yo u r
Pe rfo rm a n ce (Pu n ch -in Re co rd in g )
Begin recording using the procedures described in
You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a
recorded performance. This recording method is called
“Punch-in Recording.” This convenient function lets you
record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a
prerecorded performance in another section.
Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded
performance plays back.
User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:
When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased
as recording starts; begin playing now.
Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B
(Auto Punch-In/Out)
When you reach the end of the specified passage,
recording stops, and the KF-7 returns to playback of the
previously recorded performance.
Before you start recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage you want to re-record. Make the
setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the
passage between markers A and B.
4 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
song stops.
Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons
Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out)
● Sta rtin g Re co rd in g fro m th e Me a su re
You can play back a performance and depress the pedal
at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the
pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to
playback.
Sp e cifie d b y Bu tto n s a n d Pe d a ls
If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first
change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the
When you use the Performance Pads or [
(Rec)]
and assign <Auto Punch-In/ Out> to the buttons or pedal.
button, recording begins when you press the Pad or
button upon reaching a specified point in the song.
When you press the Pad or [
(Rec)] button once more,
the KF-7 exits recording mode and returns to normal
playback.
In/Out>.
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
● Re co rd in g a Pa ssa g e Sp e cifie d b y Ma rk e rs
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
1 . Before you start re-recording, place markers A and B to
define the passage.
2 . Begin recording.
and B to specify the passage.
Begin recording using the procedures described in
Out>.
The previously recorded performance will be played
back.
fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50
Recording begins when you press the pedal, the
Performance Pad, or the [
recording at this time.
(Rec)] button; start re-
Recording stops when you press the pedal, the
Performance Pad, or the [
(Rec)] button again, and
the previously recorded performance is played back.
3 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
performance stops.
This changes the recording mode to “Punch-In
Recording.”
* When you’re finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
1 1 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
4 . Touch <Exit>.
Co m p o sin g a n
Acco m p a n im e n t By En te rin g
Ch o rd s (Ch o rd Se q u e n ce r)
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
5 . Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment
pattern.
You can enter a chord progression and choose the places
where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an
accompaniment for a song. This feature is called “Chord
Sequencer.”
Refer to “Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer.”
6 . When you have finished inputting all the data, touch
<Execute>.
The accompaniment you’ve composed is registered at “0:
Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an
accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your
right hand.
New Song.”
When storage of the data is complete, return to the Menu
screen.
1 . Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light
Now, press the [
(Play/ Stop)] button, and try
up.
playing the melody along with the accompaniment you
created.
The Menu screen appears.
2 . Touch <Chord Sequencer>.
* Songs you’ve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the
power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to a floppy
The screen like the one shown below is called “Chord
Sequencer screen.”
fig.d-chordseq.eps_50
In p u ttin g Ch o rd s w ith th e Ch o rd Se q u e n ce r
This is the “cursor.” The cursor
shows where the chord change
or other information is input.
This is the end of the song. When
continuing to add input, insert
measures by touching <Ins>.
Move the cursor
Change the accompaniment arrangements
Select the accompaniment pattern (Division)
1 . Use the [+] [-] buttons or the dial to move the cursor to
This indicates the position where the
accompaniment pattern (Division) or
the Style Orchestrator changes.
the input position.
Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move
the cursor one measure at a time.
Display
Ins
Description
2 . Enter the chord progression and the changes in the
accompaniment pattern and arrangement.
One measure is inserted before the measure
where the cursor is positioned.
Just as when performing with Automatic
The measure in which the cursor is posi-
tioned is deleted.
Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and
Del
Allows input of chords without playing the
Chords
3 . Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the
All Clear
Clear
Deletes all of the data that’s been input.
Deletes the data at the cursor position.
measure where the cursor is currently positioned.
If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is
currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that
follow are moved forward.
Records the input chord progression.
Touch this icon when you have finished in-
putting all of the chords.
Execute
To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the
position with input you want to delete, then touch
<Clear>. This deletes the entered setting.
3 . Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select
1 2 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When
you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the
length of the intro is inserted automatically.
Ed itin g So n g s
There are many ways you can edit performances recorded
using the KF-7 Track button or 16-track sequencer.
Fu n ctio n s Th a t Ca n Be Assig n e d to th e Pe d a ls
a n d th e Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa d s
● Ba sic O p e ra tio n o f th e Ed itin g
Fu n ctio n s
* While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the
upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background
are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure
number is no longer highlighted.
•
•
•
•
Inputting a short Intro and Ending
Assign “Intro 2/ Ending 2" to a pedal or pad.
Inputting a “Variation” or “Original” without a Fill-In
Assign “Original/ Variation” to a pedal or pad.
Se le ctin g th e e d itin g fu n ctio n
1 . Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up.
Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/ C)
Assign “Leading Bass” to a pedal or pad.
The Menu screen appears.
2 . Touch <Song Edit>.
Inputting a break somewhere within the song
Assign “Break” to a pedal or pad.
A “Song Edit screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-edit1.eps_50
Ch e ck th e a cco m p a n im e n t y o u in se rte d
Here’s how to play back as much of the accompaniment as
you have input.
1 . Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the
beginning of the song.
2 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
performance is played back.
3 . Playback stops when you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
3 . Touch an editing function to select that function.
button once more.
For more detailed information, refer to the
corresponding page for each function.
● In p u ttin g Ch o rd s w ith o u t
Pla y in g th e Ke y b o a rd
You can use <Chords> at the bottom right of the Chord
Function
Undo
Description
Page
Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen.
Undoes editing operations that
have been performed.
1 . At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>.
Copies measures and internal
rhythm patterns.
Copy
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-chordinput.eps_50
Evens out sounds in recorded
performances.
Quantize
Delete
Insert
Deletes measures.
Inserts a blank measure.
Trans-
pose
Transposes parts individually.
Erases data in measures, creating
blank measures.
Erase
Part
Exchange
Exchanges the sounds in parts.
Allows corrections to be made
note by note.
2 . Touch
in each to specify the chords.
Note Edit
PC Edit
3 . Touch <Execute> to enter the chord.
Allows editing of the Tones
changes that occur during a song.
You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen.
1 2 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● ”PC” stands for “Program Change,” which is a command that
tells an instrument to change the sound it’s using. With songs
that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a “PC” needs to be
located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be
changed
● Co p y in g Me a su re s (Co p y )
You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in
the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy
when you’re composing a song that repeats a similar phrase.
fig.e-copy.e
Ex. To copy measures 5-7 to measure 8.
* Some edits can’t be undone, not even by choosing “Undo.” We
recommend saving songs to floppy disks or to user memory before
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ed itin g
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4 . Touch the item to be edited.
The value for the item being edited is highlighted.
5 . Set the value with the [-] [+] buttons or the dial.
<Copy>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-copy.eps_50
To cancel the operation once it is underway, touch
<Exit>.
6 . When you’re done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>.
When you are finished editing the setting, return to the
“Song Edit screen.”
Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
● Un d o in g Ed its (Un d o )
You can cancel an editing operation that you’ve just carried
out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and
restore data to the way it was before.
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be copied
* There are some edits that can’t be restored.
<Undo>.
Number of measures to be copied
Copy-source Track button or part number
Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen.
fig.d-e-undo.eps_50
Choosing “All” copies all Parts. “---” appears in
the <Dst> column.
Choosing “R.Pattern” copies the KF-7’s built-in
Rhythm Patterns. For more information, take a
Src
If you choose a Track button, you can only copy
to the selected Track button. You cannot copy
to the other Track buttons.
Copy-destination measure number
To
When “End” is selected, the data is copied to
the end of the song.
If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and you’re
returned to the Song Edit screen.
Times
Dst
Number of times the data is to be copied
Copy-destination part number
If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on
screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit.
1 2 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● Co rre ctin g Tim in g
Item
Content
Discre p a n cie s (Q u a n tize )
Data can be copied in the following three ways:
You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded
performance by automatically aligning the music with the
timing you specify. This is called “Quantizing.”
Replace
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, this previous recording is erased,
and the copied data is written in its place.
As an example, let’s say that the timing of some quarter-
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can
quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus
Mix
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied data is layered over the
previous recording. If the Tones used for the
copy source and copy destination are different,
the copy-destination Tone is used.
making the timing accurate.
fig.e-quantize.e
Mode
Example: Quarter-note resolution
Actual note data
Insert
1
2
2
3
4
If there is a performance recorded at the copy
destination, the copied portion is inserted with-
out erasing the previous recording. The song is
lengthened by the number of inserted mea-
sures.
Note data after quantization
Example: Sixteenth-note resolution
Actual note data
1
3
4
● Co p y in g Rh y th m Pa tte rn s to
Note data after quantization
Cre a te Rh y th m Pa rts
The KF-7 features numerous internal rhythm patterns. You
<Quantize>.
can copy these rhythm patterns to create a rhythm part.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
● For more information about the name of Rhythm Patterns,
fig.d-e-quant.eps_50
<Copy>.
Select “Rhythm Pattern” as the <Src>.
This makes the setting for copying a built-in Rhythm Pattern.
fig.d-e-copy2.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be quantized
Number of measures to be quantized
Track button or part number to be
quantized
Tr/Pt
Choosing “All” quantizes the same passage
in all Parts.
•
The rhythm pattern’s name and measure count are
indicated in the <From> column.
Quantization timing
•
•
The <Dst> is fixed at “Part 10.”
Select one of the following values
1/ 2 (half note), 1/ 4 (quarter note),
1/ 6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/ 8 (eighth note),
1/ 12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/ 16 (sixteenth
note), 1/ 24 (sixteenth-note triplet),
1/ 32 (thirty-second note)
When the <Src> is switched to something other than
“Rhythm Pattern,” the KF-7 is set to carry out normal
copying.
Resolu-
tion
Press the [
confirm the rhythm pattern. The rhythm pattern stops when
you press the [ (Play/ Stop)] button once more.
(Play/ Stop)] button to play back and
When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song
Edit screen.
1 2 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● De le tin g Me a su re s (De le te )
You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure.
When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the
performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in
● In se rtin g Bla n k Me a su re s
(In se rt)
You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This
addition of a blank measure is called “insertion.”
fig.e_insert.e
a specified passage is called “deleting.”
fig.e_delete.e
Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7
Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
<Delete>.
<Insert>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-del.eps_50
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-ins.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be deleted
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be inserted
Number of measures to be deleted
Number of measures to be inserted
Track button or part number to be deleted
Track button or part number where data will be
inserted
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is deleted.
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, blank measures are in-
serted at the same place in all parts.
1 2 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-erase.eps_50
● Tra n sp o sin g In d ivid u a l Pa rts
(Tra n sp o se )
You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually.
<Transpose>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-trans.eps_50
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be erased
Number of measures to be erased
Track button or part number to be erased
Tr/Pt
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is erased.
Item
From
For
Content
Measure number of the first measure of the
segment to be transposed
Select from the following types of performance
data to erase:
Number of measures to be transposed
All
All performance data, including notes, tempos,
Tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased.
Track button or part number to be transposed
Tr/Pt
Bias
When “All” is selected, the same portion of all
parts is transposed.
Tempo
Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for
all measures results in a single, constant tempo.
The range of transposition
You can select the range to transpose the data,
from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two oc-
taves up), adjustable in semitones.
Event
Prog.Change
Note
Erases only notes.
* You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and
sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track).
Except Notes
Erases all of the performance data except for the
notes.
● Ma k in g Me a su re s Bla n k
(Era se )
Expression
You can delete the performance data in a specified block of
measures, turning them into blank measures without
reducing the length of the song. This process is called
Erases Expression (volume change) information.
“erasing.”
fig.e_erase.e
Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Blank measures
choose <Erase>.
1 2 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● Ex ch a n g in g Pa rts
● Co rre ctin g N o te s O n e b y O n e
(Pa rt Ex ch a n g e )
(N o te Ed it)
You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part
with the notes recorded for another part. This process of
exchanging parts is called “part exchange.”
You can make corrections in a recorded performance one
note at a time. This process of making changes in individual
notes is called “note editing.”
You can make these corrections by using note editing:
<Part Exchange>.
•
•
•
Deleting misplayed notes
Changing the scale of a single note
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-partex.eps_50
Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity)
<Note Edit>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.e-note.e
Touch each
exchange.
to choose Parts you want to
Location
Pitch
Velocity
The note-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the
format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Touch
to select the part with the note to be
corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [
(Bwd)] button and the [
(Fwd)] button or
use < > < > in the upper part of the screen to find the
note to be corrected.
When you’ve found the note you want to correct, touch
“Pitch” or “Velocity” for the note.
Use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to correct the pitch or
velocity. If you want to delete the note, touch <Delete>.
When you’re done making all the settings, touch <Exit>.
Return to the Song Edit screen.
1 2 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● Mo d ify in g th e To n e Ch a n g e s in
Ch a n g in g th e Be a t in th e Mid d le
o f a So n g (Be a t Ma p )
a So n g (PC Ed it)
In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the
course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of
a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is
inserted at the place where you want the sound to change.
This instruction is called a “Program Change” (PC), and
actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the
selected Tone by them are called “PC editing.”
You can create songs that have beat changes during the
course of the song.
* You can’t change a song’s beat once it’s been recorded. Before
recording the performance, determine the beat to be used.
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
* It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or
beat that does not contain a program change.
2 . Touch <Beat Map>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-beatmap.eps_50
<PC Edit>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-e-pc.eps_50
3 . Use <
><
> in the screen or the [
(Bwd)]
and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure
whose beat you want to change.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
screen.
Location
Tone name
The PC-location display uses “Measure: Beat: Tick” as the
format. A tick is a unit of time that’s shorter than a beat.
Touch <
Touch <
> to move to the beginning of the song.
> to move to the end of the song.
Touch
to select the part with the program
4 . Touch
in each to set the beat.
change to be edited.
5 . Touch <Execute>.
The Part number appears at the top of the screen.
Use the [ (Bwd)] button and the [ (Fwd)] button or
The beat change starts with the measure you selected.
Repeat Steps 3–5 to make beat settings in other measures
as needed.
use < > < > in the upper part of the screen to find the
program change to be edited.
Re co rd in g th e p e rfo rm a n ce
When you’ve found the Program Change you want to
modify, touch “Tone Name” on the screen.
6 . Touch <Exit> twice.
The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu]
button appears.
Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone
with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial. When selecting Part 10
or 11, select the drum set or effect sound.
7 . Press the [
(Reset)] button to return the measure
number to “1.”
If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>.
When you’re done making all the settings, touch <Exit>.
8 . Start a recording.
Record the performance using the procedures described
1 2 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
Ch a n g in g th e Te m p o o f
Re co rd e d So n g s
3 . Touch the <Rec Mode>
to select <Tempo>.
This makes the setting for tempo recording.
You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic
tempo was initially set when the song was recorded.
Touch <Exit> a number of times to switch to the screen
where the measure number is indicated in the upper
right of the screen.
1 . Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo.
When the KF-7 goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo
indication is highlighted in white.
2 . Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the
[
(Reset)] button.
Re co rd in g th e Te m p o
The song’s basic tempo changes.
4 . Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to
The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn
off the power or choose a different song. Save important
move slightly before the measure where you want to
change the tempo.
5 . Press the [
flashing.
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
* If the song you’re working on has tempo changes, press the
[
(Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song
before you carry out this operation.
6 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
recording begins.
Ch a n g in g th e Te m p o W ith in
th e So n g
7 . When you get to the place where you want to change
the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial
to vary the tempo as desired.
You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition.
The KF-7 stores song tempo information and performance
data separately. Therefore, when making changes to the
tempo in a song, you must record the changes in the tempo
information independently of the performance data.
8 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button,
recording stops.
The song’s tempo changes.
This recording of the tempo is called “Tempo Recording.”
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
● Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o W h ile
Liste n in g to a So n g
You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo
changes.
Se ttin g th e Re c Mo d e to “ Te m p o ”
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
2 . Touch <Rec Mode>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50
1 2 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 6 Cre a tin g a n d Ed itin g So n g s
● Ad ju stin g th e Te m p o a t a
Pa rticu la r Me a su re
You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected
measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden
change in tempo.
1 . Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to
move to the measure where you want to change the
tempo.
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the
Basic screen.
2 . Press the [
flashing.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is
The KF-7 is put in recording standby.
3 . Use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the tempo.
4 . Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
The song’s tempo changes starts with the measure you
selected.
● While tempo recording is being used to write tempo, the tempo
display in the screen will be highlighted.
5 . When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the
change in tempo stops.
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording
mode. When you’re finished tempo recording, go back to the
● If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo
data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an
explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings,
Tempo Recording Shortcut
Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press one of the
Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording
settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo
recording is canceled when recording ends.
1 2 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
● Cre a tin g N e w Sty le s b y
Cre a tin g O rig in a l Sty le s
(Use r Sty le s)
Co m b in in g In te rn a l Mu sic
Sty le s (Sty le Co m p o se r)
You can create a new style by selecting from among the
Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, and
Accompaniment 3 parts in different Styles. This function is
called the “Style Composer.”
Although the KF-7 features a variety of internal Music Styles,
you can also create your own. These original Styles are called
“User Styles.”
You can use either of the two methods described below to
create a User Style.
* You can only combine the KF-7’s built-in Styles.
Disp la y in g th e Sty le Co m p o se r Scre e n
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
Sty le Co m p o se r
With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to
create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting
from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1,
Accompaniment 2, and Accompaniment 3 parts in different
styles.
The Menu screen appears.
fig.d-menu1.eps_50
Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from
songs composed with the 16-track sequencer.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the
KF-7 automatically chooses the other chords and arranges
the Style.
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
2 . Touch <Style Composer>.
* If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
fig.m-styledel.eps
Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Save User
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
1 3 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
A “Style Composer screen” like the one shown below
De cid in g o n a Sty le
appears.
fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50
6 . Touch <Execute>.
You have created a new Style.
The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]
button. Try playing with the new Style.
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory.
● Mu tin g Pa rts fo r a p a rticu la r d ivisio n
You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific
Divisions.
Display
Part
For example, have all of the parts play in the “Variation”
accompaniment pattern, while muting “Accompaniment 2”
and “Accompaniment 3” in the “Original” accompaniment
pattern. With this arrangement, when the accompaniment
pattern changes from the original to the variation, it creates a
more elaborate effect in the accompaniment.
R
Rhythm
B
Bass
A1
A2
A3
Accompaniment 1
Accompaniment 2
Accompaniment 3
1 . Touch the screen to choose the Part you want to mute
Icon
Function
out.
All Clear
Deletes all of the settings.
2 . Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button
You can mute the sound of particular
Parts in specific Divisions. For more in-
to switch to the division that you want to mute.
Mute
Clear
3 . Touch <Mute> on the screen.
The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you
selected.
Deletes the Styles in selected parts.
The Part Settings screen is displayed, al-
lowing you to make detailed settings to
each part. For more information, take a
If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>
again.
Options
Execute
* To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro,
ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching
to the Division.
Records the created Style to the Music
Style [User] button. Touch this when
you have finished creating the Style.
Se le ctin g th e Sty le s a ssig n e d to e a ch p a rt
3 . Touch the part to be set.
The Part you touched appears in reverse video.
4 . Press an Music Style button, then select a Style with
the touch screen or the [-]/[+] buttons and the dial.
When you have decided on a Style, touch <Exit> to
display the Style Composer screen.
5 . Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each
Part.
1 3 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
● Ed itin g th e vo lu m e a n d e ffe ct se ttin g s fo r
● Cre a tin g a Sty le fro m a So n g
Yo u Co m p o se d Yo u rse lf
(Sty le Co n ve rte r)
e a ch Pa rt
Disp la y in g th e Pa rt se ttin g s scre e n
You can take a song you’ve composed yourself and extract
the portions you need to create your own original Style.
When you’re composing a song, there’s no need to specify all
the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the KF-7
automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the
style. This function is called the “Style Converter.”
1 . At the Style Composer screen, touch <Options>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50
Style Converter features an “Auto mode” that allows you to
easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a
“Manual mode,” in which you create Styles from songs with
three kinds of chords–major, minor, and seventh chords.
When creating a song in order to create an music style, it’s
good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style.
Sty le Arra n g e m e n ts
Mo d ify in g th e se ttin g s o f e a ch p a rt
A Music Style is made up of five performance parts:
“Rhythm,” “Bass,” “Accompaniment 1,” “Accompaniment
2” and “Accompaniment 3.”
2 . Touch the
settings to be changed.
to select the part with the
The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper
part of the screen.
A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro,
melody A, melody B, bridge and ending.
With the KF-7, such changes in songs are allocated to the
following six performance states. We call these six parts of a
song “Divisions.”
3 . Touch
for each parameter to change the value.
You can also change the values by touching each
parameter name and then using the [-] [+] buttons and
the dial. Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously
returns the parameter to its original value.
Division
Intro
Performance division
The intro is played at the start of a song.
This is played at the end of a song.
This is a basic accompaniment pattern.
Display
Explanation
Ending
Original
Volume
Reverb
Adjusts the volume.
Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied
to the sound.
This is a developmental accompaniment
pattern. It is a variation on an Original.
Variation
Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied
to the sound.
Chorus
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
to make a song more lively.
Fill-In To
Variation
Changes the left-right direction from which
the sound appears to come.
This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a
juncture where the mood changes. It is used
to make a song more sedate.
Fill-In To
Original
Panpot
When you touch
, the sound moves to
to move the sound to
the right; touch
the left.
You can make a song more lively or more restrained by
increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can
also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the
Divisions.
You can change the Tone for the selected Part by
pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this
screen is displayed. When selecting Rhythm Part, you
can touch <Drum Set> to select the drum set or effect
sound.
Fin ish in g th e se ttin g s
4 . Touch <Exit>.
The Style Composer screen appears.
1 3 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
● Cre a tin g Sty le s in Au to Mo d e
Po in ts to n o te w h e n cre a tin g so n g s
•
Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh
chords to create the song. We recommend using
diminished seventh chords to compose the song.
It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
•
Rhythm
Bass
Accomp Accomp Accomp
1
2
3
D (10)
2
7
8
9
Parameter
Name
Settings Content
● When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to
Conv.Mode
Chord Root
Switches the mode (Auto/ Manual)
Cre a tin g so n g s
Chord root for the segment to be
extracted
1 . Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
Chord type for the segment to be
extracted (major/ minor/ seventh)
Chord Type
Division
From
related sections.
Division
Measure number of the first measure of
the segment to be extracted
Disp la y in g th e Sty le Co n ve rte r scre e n
2 . Press the [Menu] button.
For
Number of measures extracted
The Menu screen appears.
Ma k in g th e se ttin g s
3 . Touch <Style Converter>.
4 . Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the
* If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the
message “Please select a song” appears. Use the [Select/Listen
procedure again.
dial to switch the mode to “Auto.”
This makes the setting for the Auto mode.
5 . Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the
[-] [+] buttons or the dial to input the chord root and
type for the segment to be extracted.
* If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the
one shown below appears.
fig.m-styledel.eps
6 . Touch <Division>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the
dial to select the Division.
Display
Intro
Performance division
Intro
Original
Original accompaniment pattern
Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Please save the
When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is
deleted, and a new User Style is created.
Fill To
Vari
From the fill-in to the variation
Variation
Fill To Ori
Ending
Variation accompaniment pattern
From the fill-in to the original
Ending
A “Style Converter screen” like the one shown appears.
* Only one measure can be extracted when “Fill To Vari” or
“Fill To Ori” is selected for the Division. The number of
measures may also be limited in other Divisions.
1 3 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
Disp la y in g th e Sty le Co n ve rte r scre e n
7 . Touch <From> and <For>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or
the dial to select the measures to be extracted.
2 . Press the [Menu] button.
Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can
listen to performance of the portion which you chose.
3 . Touch <Style Converter>.
The “Style Converter screen” appears.
8 . Repeat Steps 5–7 to create Styles for all of the
4 . Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the
Divisions.
dial to switch the mode to “Manual.”
*
If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern.
This makes the setting for the Manual mode.
De cid in g o n a Sty le
9 . When you’re done making all the Division settings,
When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen,
you can listen to the performance of the part selected
with <Options>.
touch <Execute>.
The User Style is recorded to the [User] button.
* If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User
Style you’ve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to
delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory.
● Ch a n g in g a n Ex tra cte d Pa rt
You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-
track sequencer.
* The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song
includes data other than this, the results you get might not be
what was intended.
1 . At the Style Converter screen, touch <Options>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-styleconv.eps_50
•
•
•
Keyboard performance data
Amount of Reverb effect applied
Amount of Chorus effect applied
● Cre a tin g a Sty le in Ma n u a l Mo d e
When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can
clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each
individual chord.
Po in ts to n o te w h e n cre a tin g so n g s
•
Record your performance with the three chord types of
diminished seventh, major, and minor.
2 . Touch the performance Part with settings you want to
•
It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for
the Parts of the 16-track sequencer.
change.
3 . Use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to specify which 16-
Chords Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp
track Sequencer performance part you want to extract.
1
2
3
● In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of
Major
Seventh
Minor
D (10)
3
2
4
5
6
the screen. Set the Parts for all chords.
-
-
7
8
9
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Style Converter screen.
12
13
14
15
● The chords all share the same Rhythm Part.
● If you want to use the performance of other part, check out
Cre a tin g so n g s
1 . Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song.
related sections.
1 3 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
fig.d-stylesave.eps_50
Sa vin g a Use r Sty le
You can save the User Styles you create to floppy disks or to
the user memory. When saved to the user memory, User
Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off. You can
also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the
Music Style [User] button.
You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory.
W h a t is th e Use r Me m o ry ?
The user memory is the area within the instrument
where User Styles created with the KF-7, sets of User
Programs, and other such data are stored.
De te rm in in g th e n a m e o f th e Sty le to b e sa ve d
4 . Touch <Rename>.
You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs
saved on floppy disks.
A “Rename screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-stylename.eps_50
Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even
when the KF-7’s power is turned off.
● When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user
memory and restore the settings to its factory settings, refer to
Pre p a ra tio n s fo r sa vin g d a ta
When saving to a floppy disk, first insert a floppy disk in the
disk drive.
1 . Press the Music Style [User] button.
When you touch
, the cursor moves.
A “User Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
When you touch the icon for the character to be input,
the character appears at the cursor position.
For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession
cycles you through the available choices in that character
group (A→B→C→A...).
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters
through “English (upper case),” “English (lower case),”
“numerals,” “symbols,” then back to “English (upper
case).”
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor
position is deleted.
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/
Disk> in the lower part of the screen.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
2 . Touch <File>.
5 . When you have finished with the name, touch <Exit>.
3 . Touch <Save>.
De te rm in in g th e sa ve d e stin a tio n
A “Save Style screen” like the following appears.
6 . Touch <Disk> or <User>.
Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch
<User> if you are saving to user memory.
1 3 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
● De le tin g Sa ve d Use r Sty le s
7 . Touch
number.
to select the save-destination
This deletes User Styles that have been saved to floppy disks
or in user memory.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
that number.
When deleting a User Style on a floppy disk, first insert the
floppy disk in the disk drive.
If you select a number with a previously saved User
Style and then save to that number, the previously saved
User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the
User Style being saved, select a number in the save-
destination column that does not yet have a name.
1 . Press the Music Style [User] button.
A “User Style screen” appears.
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/
Disk> in the lower part of the screen.
8 . Touch <Save>.
2 . Touch <File>.
The saving process starts.
3 . Touch <Delete>.
A “Delete Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-styledel.eps_50
* Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress.
Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal memory, making it
unusable.
4 . Touch <Disk> or <User>.
Touch <User> if you are deleting a file from user
memory; touch <Disk> if you are deleting a file from a
floppy disk.
5 . Touch
6 . Touch <Delete>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
or
to select the Style to be deleted.
fig.m-filedel.eps
7 . Touch <OK>.
The selected Style is deleted.
If you touch <Cancel>, the Style won’t be deleted.
* Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress.
Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal memory, making it
unusable.
1 3 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 7 Cre a tin g Mu sic Sty le s
Sp e cify in g th e Co p y De stin a tio n
Co p y in g Sty le s o n Disk s to
th e Use r Me m o ry
6 . Touch <User>
to select the copy destination
for the Style.
You can take User Styles saved on floppy disks and copy
them to user memory.
If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to
that number.
You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and
copy them to floppy disks.
If you select a number with a previously saved Style and
then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is
deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved,
select a number in the save-destination column that does
not yet have a name.
1 . Insert the disk with the Style to be copied in the disk
drive.
2 . Press the [User] button.
7 . Touch <Execute>.
A “User Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50
Do not eject the floppy disk from the disk drive before
the copy is finished.
The Style on the disk is copied to user memory.
* Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress.
Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal memory, making it
unusable.
● Co p y in g Sty le s Sa ve d in th e
Use r Me m o ry to Disk s
You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to
If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User/
Disk> in the lower part of the screen.
floppy disks.
3 . Touch <File>.
In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the
“Copy Style screen” in Step 4 above so that the arrow points
upwards. This turns the KF-7’s settings to copy the styles in
the user memory to the floppy disk.
4 . Touch <Copy>.
A “Copy Style screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-copystyle.eps_50
The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying
Styles from disks to user memory.
Sp e cify in g th e co p y so u rce
5 . Touch <Disk>
to select the Style you want
to copy.
When “All” is selected, all of the Styles on the disk are
copied to user memory.
1 3 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ad ju stin g Re so n a n ce
(Re so n a n ce )
You can adjust this resonance (Sympathetic Resonance)
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r
O n e -To u ch Pia n o
You can make detailed settings, such as those for the
keyboard touch and tunings, allowing you to set up the KF-7
just the way you want for your piano performances.
when the damper pedal is depressed.
fig.d-p-reso.eps_50
● Pro ce d u re
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button.
The Piano screen appears.
fig.d-piano.eps_50
Display
Explanation
Standard
This replicates the resonance inside a piano.
The KF-7 physically reproduces the vibra-
tion of other free strings when keys are
played, allowing you to experience the feel-
ing of acoustic piano reverberation and res-
onance (Physical Damper Simulation).
Advanced
Demo
2 . Touch <Functions>.
Touch <Exit> to go back the Piano screen.
fig.d-pianoopt1.eps_50
In addition to the effects of Advanced, this
also replicates the noise produced when
you depress the pedal.
Touch the <Standard>, <Advanced>, or <Demo> icon to
choose the type of resonant sound.
Touch <Level>
applied.
to adjust the amount of effect
Display
Page
Display
Page
Touch
to deepen the effect. When you touch
, the
Hammer Response
String Resonance
Key Touch
effect is lessened.
● The Resonance settings may change when you use the
● When you’ve chosen <Demo>, touching <Exit> changes the
● You can set the master tuning and make a variety of other
settings to the instrument starting from the third page of
setting for resonant notes to <Advanced>.
3 . Touch the icon for the setting.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Piano screen.
1 3 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ch a n g in g th e Tu n in g (Tu n in g )
Tuning
system
Characteristics
● Ch o o sin g th e Tu n in g
This temperament is a partial compro-
mise of just intonation in order to allow
modulation.
You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic
temperaments (tuning methods).
Meantone
Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal
temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at
one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems
in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use
when a composition was created, you can experience the
sonorities of chords originally intended for that song.
This temperament is a combination of
meantone and Pythagorean tempera-
ments. It allows you to play in all keys.
(First method, number three.)
Werkmeister
Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system.
When playing in a temperament other than equal
temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note
corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key)
of the key in which you will play.
fig.d-p-temp.eps_50
Touch <Key>
to select the tonic.
If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to
select the tonic.
● Se ttin g th e Tu n in g Cu rve (Stre tch Tu n in g )
Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and
the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This
method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as
“stretched tuning.”
You can choose from among the eight tunings described
below.
A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning
compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is
called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces
subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play.
Tuning
Characteristics
system
This temperament divides the octave
into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be
slightly out of tune by the same amount.
This setting is in effect when you turn on
the power.
Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the
tuning curve.
Equal
When set to “ON,” the tuning curve features extended low
and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano
solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on.
This temperament makes the 5th and
3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to play-
ing melodies and cannot be transposed,
but is capable of beautiful sonorities.
Just (Maj)
When set to “OFF,” the standard tuning curve is used. It is
suitable when playing in an ensemble with other
instruments.
Just intonation differs between major
and minor keys. The same results as ma-
jor can be obtained in a minor key.
Just (Min)
Arabic
This tuning is suitable for the music of
Arabia.
This temperament is a modification of
meantone temperament and just intona-
tion, allowing more freedom of modula-
tion. Performances are possible in all
keys (III).
Kirnberger
This temperament is based on the theo-
ries of the Greek philosopher Pythago-
ras, and has pure fourths and fifths.
Chords containing a third will sound im-
pure, but melodies will sound good.
Pythagorean
1 3 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ch a n g in g Ho w Ra p id ly So u n d s Are
Ex p re sse d Acco rd in g to th e Fo rce
Use d to Pla y th e Ke y s
● Ad ju stin g th e Re so n a n t So u n d s
(Strin g Re so n a n ce )
When the keys are pressed on an acoustic piano, the strings
for keys that are already pressed also vibrate
sympathetically. The function used to reproduce this
resonance is called “String Resonance.”
(Ha m m e r Re sp o n se )
You can adjust the timing with which sounds are produced
according to the force used to play the keys. This function is
called “Hammer Resonance.”
fig.d-p-streso.eps_50
When a key is pressed on an acoustic piano, it causes a
hammer to move and strike the strings, producing sound.
The hammers move more slowly when the keys are played
gently, meaning that sounds are produced just slightly later
than when you play the keyboard with greater force.
When the Hammer Response function is on, the interval
between the time a key is pressed and the time sound is
produced varies according to the force used to play the key.
The more gently the key is pressed, the more delayed the
timing of the sound.
Touch <ON> to turn the String Resonance function on.
Response>.
fig.d-p-hmreso.eps_50
Touch the screen slider to adjust the amount of effect
applied.
Moving the slider to “Max” increases the amount of
resonance effect applied. Moving the slider to “Min” reduces
the amount of effect applied.
Touch <OFF> to cancel the effect.
Touch <ON> to turn the Hammer Response function on.
Touch the screen slider to adjust the time it takes for a key to
sound after it is pressed.
The more the slider is moved to “Slow,” the more delayed
the sound is when the keys are played softly. Conversely,
sounds are produced more quickly when the keys are played
with greater force.
Touch <OFF> to cancel the effect.
1 4 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ad ju stin g th e Ke y b o a rd To u ch
(Ke y To u ch )
You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r
O n e -To u ch Arra n g e r
keys.
● Pro ce d u re
1 . Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to
fig.d-p-key.eps_50
display the Basic screen.
fig.d-arrbasic.eps_50
Display
Explanation
2 . Touch <Functions>.
Notes sound at an unchanging volume level,
regardless of how lightly or forcefully you
play the keyboard.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50
Fixed
This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You
can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less
forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard
feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for
children, whose hands have less strength.
Light
This sets the keyboard to the standard touch.
You can play with the most natural touch.
This setting is closest to the response of an
acoustic piano.
Medium
This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You
have to play the keyboard more forcefully
than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so
the keyboard touch feels heavier. This set-
ting allows you to add more expression
when playing dynamically.
Parame-
Description
ter Name
Heavy
Key
Touch
Sets the key at which the keyboard is
Split Point
Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard.
One
Touch
Setting
Selects the setting to be specified when the
One Touch Program [Arranger] button is
To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen.
Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the right
to make the key touch lighter.
Pedal
Setting
Arranger
Config
Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment
Tuning
3 . Touch the name of the parameter to be set.
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Basic screen.
1 4 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ch a n g in g th e Ke y b o a rd ’s Sp lit
● Ch a n g in g Mu sic Sty le s W ith o u t
Ch a n g in g th e To n e o r Te m p o
(O n e To u ch Se ttin g )
Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and
tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected
automatically. However, you can also set it so the tempo and
Tone settings don’t change when you change Music Styles.
Po in t (Sp lit Po in t)
This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is
divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using
the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split
The setting is at “F#3” when the KF-7 is powered up.
fig.splitpoint.e
fig.d-1touchset.eps_50
F 3 (Split Point)
B1
B6
● The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50
Display
Explanation
Suitable
Tone
The suitable tone for a Music Style is
selected automatically.
Suitable
Tempo
The suitable tempo for a Music Style is
selected automatically.
Other
Setting
Other settings (Style Orchestrator, phrases,
etc.) are changed automatically.
Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part
of the screen.
Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off.
All items are set to ON when you turn on the power.
Parameters switched to OFF (highlighted in black) do not
change, even when the Music Style is changed.
The key you chose becomes the split point.
To set another key as the split point, touch
the screen, then specify the key.
in
You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6.
1 4 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Fu n ctio n s th a t ca n b e a ssig n e d (Pe d a ls,
● Assig n in g Fu n ctio n s to Pe d a ls
a n d Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa d s (Pe d a l
Se ttin g / Use r Fu n ctio n s)
Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa d s)
Function
Explanation
You can assign a variety of functions to the soft and
sostenuto pedals and to the performance pads.
Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or off.
The function stays on as long as the pedal to
which this is assigned is pressed.
When assigned to a Performance Pad, this is
alternately switched on and off each time the
pad is pressed.
You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the
corresponding pedal or pad.
Leading
Bass
● Assig n in g Fu n ctio n s to Pe d a ls
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
Only the accompaniment’s rhythm part is
played. The next time you specify a chord
with the keyboard, the No Chord function is
cancelled, and all of the accompaniment
parts are played.
No Chord
Break
During the performance of Automatic
Accompaniment, the accompaniment stops
for one measure only.
Fill In To
Variation
Performs the same function as the Fill In [To
Fill In To
Original
Performs the same function as the Fill In [To
Touch
to assign functions to each of the pedals.
A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment
pattern after that doesn’t change.
Fill In
* Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores the
This plays a fill-in half a measure long, then
switches to the Variation accompaniment
pattern.
Half Fill In
Variation
● Assig n in g Fu n ctio n s to Pe rfo rm a n ce Pa d s
1 . Press the [User Function] button and watch the
This plays a fill-in half a measure long, then
switches to the Original accompaniment
pattern.
Half Fill In
Original
indicator light up.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrfunc.eps_50
Original/
Variation
This changes the accompaniment pattern
without inserting a fill-in.
When this function is used during Automat-
ic Accompaniment, the accompaniment re-
Arranger
Reset
Performs the same function as the [Intro/
are played.
Intro 1/
Ending 1
Performs the same function as the [Intro/
are played.
Intro 2/
Ending 2
Arranger
Start/Stop
Performs the same function as the [Start/
2 . Touch
to assign functions to each of the
Performance Pads.
Orches-
trator Up
This changes the accompaniment to a more
Orches-
trator
Down
Changes the accompaniment to a simpler ar-
Melody
Intelli-
gence
Turns the Melody Intelligence function on
1 4 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Fu n ctio n s th a t ca n b e a ssig n e d (Pe d a ls
Function
Explanation
O n ly )
This starts Automatic Accompaniment with
a fade-in (where the volume gets progres-
sively louder), ends it with a fade-out
(where the volume gets progressively soft-
er), then stops.
Fade In/
Out
Function
Explanation
Pressing the pedal during playback of a song
stops the playback. When the pedal is
released, playback resumes from the begin-
ning of the measure that was playing when
the pedal was pressed. When the pedal is
pressed in rapid succession, the playback
will resume backs up the same number of
measures as the number of times the pedal is
pressed.
Rotary
Slow/Fast
This switches the speed of the rotary effect*
when you perform with an organ Tone.
Replay
While the pedal or Performance Pad is held
down, the pitch of the sound drops tempo-
rarily, returning to the original pitch when
the pedal or Pad is released. This can be ef-
fective for simulating the performance of in-
struments like a Hawaiian guitar.
Glide
Upper
Soft
The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal
Compos-
er Start/
Stop
Performs the same function as the [
Upper
Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score ap-
pearing on the display to the next page
while the performance of a song is stopped.
Lower
Damper
Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds
in the left-hand side of the keyboard.
Page
Fwd 1
This raises the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Bend Up
Press the pedal or the Pad turns the score ap-
pearing on the display to the preceding page
while the performance of a song is stopped.
Page
Bwd 1
Bend
Down
This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the
keyboard.
Punch In/
Out
During Punch-in Recording, this starts and
When the pedal is pressed during a layer per-
formance, the Tone volume changes between
two levels, depending on how firmly the
pedal is pressed.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX1” selected
increases the layer Tone volume. The layer
Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless
of how forcefully the keys are played.
You can set the tempo according to the inter-
val at which the pedal or pad is pressed
Tap
Tempo
Pedal EX1
* What is the leading bass function?
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord
as the bass tone is called “Leading Bass.” When this function
is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions
are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as
the bass tone.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX2” selected
increases the layer Tone volume.
Pedal EX2
Pedal EX3
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX3” selected
increases the layer Tone volume, while the
volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased.
The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume,
regardless of how forcefully the keys are
played.
* What is the rotary effect?
This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar
to the sound when a rotary speaker is used.
Pressing the pedal with “Pedal EX4” selected
Pedal EX4 increases the layer Tone volume, while the
volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased.
Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this
spinning effect.
Overall volume level can be controlled.
Expression A separately sold expression pedal (EV-5)
needs to be connected.
* The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal
if “Pedal EX1–4” is assigned to more than one pedal.
● Using the “Bend Up” or “Bend Down” function during a
right-hand side of the keyboard. Additionally, the range in
which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is
1 4 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ch a n g in g th e Be n d Ra n g e
(Pe d a l Se ttin g )
The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a
● Ch a n g in g Ho w Ch o rd s Are
Pla y e d a n d Sp e cifie d
(Arra n g e r Co n fig )
played note is called the “bender effect.”
This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are
played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords.
With the KF-7, you can assign the bender function to a pedal,
then apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing the
pedal.
W h a t a re th e Ch o rd To n e a n d Ba ss To n e ?
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync
play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the
“chord tone,” and the root of the chord that is played at the
same time is called the “bass tone.”
You can also make a setting that determines how much the
pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The
maximum range of change in pitch is called the “bend
range.”
fig.d-pedalset.eps_50
fig.d-arrset.eps_50
Touch <Bend Range>
setting.
to adjust the bend range
Touch
of each item to make settings.
You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in
half-tone steps, up to one octave).
Parame-
ter Name
Value
Description
All Music Style parts are
played.
Accomp
Accomp
Only Music Style rhythm
parts, chord Tones, and
bass Tones are played.
Chord&Bs
OFF,
Acoustic Bs.,
A. Bass+Cymbl,
Fingered Bs.,
Picked Bs.,
Fretless Bs.,
Slap Bass,
Bass
Tone
Organ Bass,
Synth Bass 101,
Thum Voice
Selects the bass Tone or
chord Tone. When set to
“Off,” no tone is played.
OFF, E.Piano 1,
E. Piano 2,
Soft E. Piano,
Hard E. Piano,
Slow Strings,
Strings,
Chord
Tone
Choir,
Doos Voice
1 4 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Ch a n g in g th e Se ttin g s fo r th e
Co u n t-In a n d Co u n td o w n
Parame-
ter Name
Value
Description
The function that allows
the KF-7 to recognize ac-
companiment chords
when you press only one
or two keys during Auto-
matic Accompaniment is
called the “Chord Intelli-
When set to “Off,” play
all of the notes to specify
chords.
1 . Press the [Metronome] button.
2 . Touch <Count In> or <Countdown>.
Chord
Intelli
ON, OFF
The “Count In settings screen” or the “Countdown
settings screen” appears.
3 . Touch
of each item to make settings.
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Metronome screen.
● Pla cin g a Ma rk e r in th e Mid d le
● Se ttin g s fo r th e Co u n t-In
o f a Me a su re
A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected
measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a
position partway through a measure.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
The Menu screen appears.
2 . Touch <Marker>.
The Marker screen appears.
3 . Touch <Option>.
A screen like the following appears.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
Parame-
Value
Description
ter Name
Count-in will be added
(ON) or not (OFF).
Switch
ON, OFF
Stick, Click,
Electronic,
Voice (JPN),
Voice (ENG),
Wood Block,
Triangle Casta-
nets,
Specify the count-in
sound.
Sound
Hand Clap
Animal
4 . Touch <Resolution>
to choose the marker
Specify the length (number
of measures) of the count-
in.
setting.
Mea-
sures
1, 2
Indication
Description
When “Repeat” is turned
ON on the Marker screen
whether the count-in will
sound each time the range
between the markers is re-
peated, or only the first
time.
This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the measure.
Measure
Beat
Repeat
First, Every
This lets you place a marker at the
beginning of the beat.
5 . Touch <Exit> to go back to the Marker screen.
1 4 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Se ttin g s fo r th e Co u n td o w n
O th e r Se ttin g s
You can change the tuning, the language shown on the
display, and other settings to make the KF-7 easier to use.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
● Pro ce d u re
1 . Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button.
2 . Touch <Functions>.
When you touch <Functions> on the Basic screen, the
first page displayed shows the parameters for the
When you touch <Functions> on the Piano screen, the
parameters for the piano performance settings continue
Parame-
ter Name
A “Functions screen” like the following appears.
fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50
Value
Description
Countdown will be added
(ON) or not (OFF).
Switch
ON, OFF
Voice (JPN),
Voice (ENG)
Specify the countdown
sound.
Sound
Part
Specify the track or part
that will determine the be-
ginning of the perfor-
mance when added a
countdown.
Both Track
Lower Track
Upper Track
Part 1–16
Parameter
Description
Master Tune
Selects the language used in the
Language
Opening
Message
Sets the message that appears when
MIDI Ensemble
User Image
Display
Selects the image data and display
MIDI Settings
Program
Change
Remains the beat indicator off at all
Beat Indicator
MIDI Sync
Stores the edited settings and other
Memory Backup
Restores the content stored with
Memory Backup to the original factory
Factory Reset
Touch Screen
Allows for calibration of the touch
1 4 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
3 . Touch the name of the parameter you want to set.
● Ch a n g in g th e Scre e n Me ssa g e
W h e n th e Po w e r Is Tu rn e d O n
(O p e n in g Me ssa g e )
Refer to the corresponding page for each function.
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.
You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase
● Ch a n g in g Sta n d a rd Pitch
when the power is turned on.
(Ma ste r Tu n e )
“Standard pitch” generally refers to the pitch that is heard
when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble
with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the
instruments of the ensemble match. Tuning all the
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-openmsg.eps_50
instruments to a standard pitch is called “master tuning.”
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-tuning.eps_50
Use
to move the cursor.
When you touch the character icon, the character is input
where at the position.
When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the
character appears at the cursor position. For example,
touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the
available choices in that character group (A→B→C→A...).
Touch
to change the pitch.
Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3–466.2 Hz.
The setting is at “440.0 Hz” when the KF-7 is powered up.
Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through
“English (upper case),” “English (lower case),” “numerals,”
“symbols,” then back to “English (upper case).”
● Ch a n g in g th e La n g u a g e (La n g u a g e )
Five choices are available for the language used in displaying
information on the screen.
When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is
deleted.
When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor
position.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-lang.eps_50
When you have finished inputting the characters, touch
<Execute>.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
● If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and then
touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen that
normally appears when you turn on the power to the
instrument.
Touch
to select the language.
Available settings
English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish
* German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some
functions. Other screens will be displayed in English.
1 4 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Im a g e d a ta th a t KF-7 ca n d isp la y
● Se le ctin g Im a g e s To Be Sh o w n o n
th e KF-7 (Use r Im a g e Disp la y )
Size
320 x 240 pixels
1 bit (2 colors)
BMP format
You can have image data from computers and other devices
shown on the onboard display.
Color
Display>.
Format
* The KF-7 cannot deal with compressed
image data.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrimage.eps_50
1–8 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A
filename extension of “.BMP” (uppercase
characters) must be added after the name.
The following characters can be used to
name an image.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s
t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ‘ ( ) -
@ ~ { } ^ _ !
Name
* If you use a character that cannot be used
in a name, it will be replaced by another
character when displayed.
Se le ctin g th e im a g e s to b e d isp la y e d
First, take a floppy disk to which the image data stored
in the KF-7 has been saved, and insert the disk in the
disk drive.
1 . Touch <File>.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-usrimage2.eps_50
2 . Touch the name of the stored image data.
When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the
selected image data on the display selected in Step 1.
3 . Touch <Save>.
The selected image data is stored.
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the previous screen.
To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>.
1 4 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Tu rn in g O ff th e Be a t In d ica to r
● Re sto rin g th e Fa cto ry Se ttin g s
(Be a t In d ica to r)
(Fa cto ry Re se t)
The beat indicator normally flashes in time with the
metronome, Music Style, or song tempo. However, if you
wish, it can be set to remain off at all times.
settings. This operation is referred to as “Factory Reset.”
* When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been
stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their
factory defaults.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-memory.eps_50
● This operation does not return the touch screen calibration
settings to the original factory condition. To return the touch
screen calibration settings to the original factory settings, refer
● When you want to restore the content registered to the KF-7’s
Touch
to turn the setting ON, or OFF (so the beat
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-factory.eps_50
indicator remains off).
● Re m e m b e rin g th e Se ttin g s
Eve n W h e n th e Po w e r is
Tu rn e d O ff (Me m o ry Ba ck u p )
Normally, the various settings revert to their default values
when the power is turned off. However, you can specify that
the settings will be remembered even when the power is
turned off. This function is called “Memory Backup.”
● For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup, refer to
Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings.
When the setting is changed, the previous screen returns.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-memory.eps_50
When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched,
and you’re returned to the previous screen.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
Touch <Execute>.
The confirmation message appears on screen.
Touch <OK> to store the setting.
When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous
screen will reappear.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
1 5 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
● Ca lib ra tin g th e To u ch Scre e n
Fo rm a ttin g th e Use r Me m o ry
(To u ch Scre e n )
The KF-7 features an internal storage area where you can
save recorded performances and User Styles. This space is
called the “User Memory.”
If you’ve been using the touch screen for some time, the
pointer may be shifted, making the KF-7 react incorrectly.
You should correct this displacement when necessary by
performing calibration (repositioning).
The following content is stored to the user memory.
•
•
•
•
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
To delete all of the content held in the user memory and
restore the original factory settings, carry out the following
procedure.
1 . Press the [Disk] button.
Even when you press the Music Style [User] button
(User/ Disk screen) or the [User Program] button, the
rest of the procedure is the same.
2 . Touch <File>.
Touch <Execute>.
3 . Touch <Format User Memory>.
Touch the points indicated.
A screen like the one shown below appears.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
* Do this carefully, because touching a location that’s different
from the one indicated for the pointer may make the
displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer
accurately.
When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the
settings.
* If you don’t write them to memory, the calibration settings
will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off.
Re tu rn in g th e to u ch scre e n ca lib ra tio n se ttin g s
to th e o rig in a l fa cto ry se ttin g s
4 . Touch <OK>.
If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch
screen calibration settings revert to the original factory
settings.
All of the content in the user memory is deleted.
If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and
you’re returned to the previous screen.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KF-7’s internal
memory, making it unusable.
● Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings
other than the user memory settings. To restore settings other
than those for the user memory to the original factory settings,
1 5 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 8 Va rio u s Se ttin g s
Au to m a tica lly Sta rtin g th e
Q u ick To u r
Disa b lin g Fu n ctio n s O th e r
Th a n Pia n o Pe rfo rm a n ce
(Pa n e l Lo ck )
You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts
automatically with no operation required.
The “Panel Lock” function locks the KF-7 in a state where
only piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be
disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently
modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.
1 . Hold down the [Wonderland/Game] button and press
the [Part Balance] button.
The Quick Tour screen appears.
* In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be
played.
2 . Touch <Option>.
fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50
1 . Turn down the volume all the way.
2 . Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power.
3 . While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button,
press the [Power] switch and turn on the power.
Then, continue to hold down the button until the Piano
screen appears.
fig.panel_lock.eps
3 . Touch <ON> or <OFF>.
When set to “ON,” the Quick Tour starts when you turn
on the power. The demo stops as soon as you carry out
any kind of operation. If no operation is performed for
5–10 minutes after that, the automatic demo starts again.
When set to “OFF,” the Quick Tour does not start unless
you touch the Quick Tour screen icon.
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Quick Tour screen.
All buttons except for piano play are disabled.
* For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick
Start.
Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the
grand piano sound will be heard.
To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down
to the minimum, and turn on the power once again.
1 5 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
You can connect the KF-7 to external devices such as audio
Co n n e ctin g MIDI De vice s
equipment and MIDI instruments.
By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging
performance data, you can control one device from the other.
You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance
For instance, you can output sound from the other
data from the KF-7, or play performance data from the KF-7
instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument.
on the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound
W h a t’s MIDI?
module, you can perform on the KF-7 and hear the sounds
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface,” was
played through the MIDI sound module.
developed as a universal standard for the exchange of
performance data between electronic instruments and
The KF-7 has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you
can also hook it up a stereo system for an even more
impressive sound.
computers.
The KF-7 is equipped with MIDI connectors and a Computer
connector to let it exchange performance data with external
devices. These connectors can be used to connect the KF-7 to
an external device for even greater versatility.
You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording
equipment and record your performances.
984
* A separate publication titled “MIDI Implementation” is also
available. It provides complete details concerning the way
MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require
this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service
Center or authorized Roland distributor.
You can use a sequencer program (such as Roland Visual-
MT) to record performance data from the KF-7 and play
performance data from the program on the KF-7.
● Co n n e cto rs
fig.09-
MIDI O u t Co n n e cto r
Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a
pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI
connector.
982
* No data for the music that is played will be output from MIDI
OUT.
MIDI In Co n n e cto r
Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI
device using a MIDI cable (sold separately).
This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external
MIDI devices. The KF-7 receiving MIDI messages can output
sounds, exchange tones and perform other operations.
* External MIDI devices can’t be used for remotely changing the
Tones played by the KF-7’s keyboard.
1 5 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
● Ma k in g th e Co n n e ctio n s
Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith
Co n n e cte d MIDI De vice s
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other 921
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
You can have connected MIDI devices played by the tempo
produced by the KF-7; you can also have the tempo
produced by connected MIDI devices play the KF-7. This
setting is called the “MIDI Sync.”
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-7 and on
the device you’re about to connect.
Having connected MIDI devices work at the same tempo, and
start and stop at the same timing is called “synchronization.”
2 . Switch off the power to the KF-7 and the device you’re
about to connect.
1 . Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
3 . Set the Computer switch on the rear panel to “MIDI.”
Program [Piano] button.
4 . Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI
2 . Touch <Functions>.
connectors to each other.
3 . Touch <MIDI Sync>.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
The following screen is appeared.
fig.09-04.eps
5 . Switch on the power to the KF-7 and the connected
device.
6 . Adjust the volume level on the KF-7 and the connected
device.
7 . You should also set the MIDI settings as needed.
For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to
Co n n e ctio n Ex a m p le s:
Se tu p w ith a MIDI Se q u e n ce r
fig.09-10
4 . Touch
to make the setting.
Roland MT Series
Displayed
Int
Meaning
Out
MIDI
In
Adjustment of the KF-7’s tempo and starting
and stopping of playback and recording is
performed by the KF-7.
KF-7
The KF-7’s tempo as well as the starting and
stopping of playback and recording is con-
trolled by the MIDI device connected to the
KF-7’s MIDI In connector. When there is no
MIDI device connected, then tempo chang-
ing operation can not be controlled by the
KF-7
Ext
* When the KF-7 is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to
Local OFF. Refer to “Disconnecting the Keyboard from the
Playback and recording of songs is con-
trolled by the connected MIDI device.
Co n n e ctin g w ith a MIDI So u n d Mo d u le
fig.09-
Remote
Auto
Sound Module
MIDI
The KF-7’s tempo as well as the starting and
stopping of playback and recording is con-
trolled by the MIDI device connected to the
KF-7’s MIDI In connector. When there is no
MIDI device connected, then these opera-
tions can be performed by the KF-7.
THRU
OUT
IN
KF-7
* Unless the above is set to either “Int” or “Auto,” the KF-7’s
buttons cannot be used to adjust the KF-7’s tempo. Ordinarily,
you should set this to “Int.”
Touch <Exit> to go back to the Function screen.
1 5 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
Pe rfo rm in g in En se m b le w ith
MIDI In stru m e n ts
(MIDI En se m b le )
MIDI Se ttin g s
With the KF-7, you can make MIDI settings like those
described below.
“MIDI Setting Screen”
You can connect an electronic percussion device or other
MIDI instrument to the KF-7’s MIDI In connector for
ensemble playing. Making the MIDI settings for the
instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The
sounds from the connected MIDI instrument are played from
the KF-7’s speaker.
fig.09-04.eps
1 . Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button.
2 . Touch <Functions>.
3 . Touch <MIDI Ensemble>.
Display
Description
A screen like the following appears.
fig.09-04.eps
Chooses the MIDI send channel
Tx Channel
Switches Local Control on or off
Local Control
“Program Change Screen”
fig.09-04.eps
4 . Select the method for using the MIDI In connector.
Displayed
Normal
Meaning
Normal setting. Make changes in Tone and
other settings from the connected device.
Select this when you have percussion pads
(such as Roland’s SPD-20 Total Percussion
Pad) connected to the KF-7’s MIDI In con-
nector. You do not need to make any MIDI
settings on the KF-7. Select pad Tones and
make other settings from the connected pads
(for further details, refer to the Owner’s
Manual provided with the pads).
Display
Description
Pad
Sends Bank Select MSB messages.
Bank Select MSB
Sends Bank Select LSB messages.
Bank Select LSB
Program Change
Select this when you have a keyboard (such
as a Roland A-37 or AX-7 MIDI Keyboard
Controller) connected to the KF-7’s MIDI In
connector. You can select tones for the con-
nected keyboard from the KF-7. No MIDI
settings need be made on the KF-7.
Sends Program Change messages
Keyboard
5 . When “Keyboard” is selected in Step 4 above, use
to select the Tone.
The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone.
1 5 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
Local On: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
Ma k in g th e Se ttin g s
connected.
fig.09-
1 . Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch
Program [Piano] button.
Sound is emitted
2 . Touch <Functions>.
3 . Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>.
Sound Generator
Local On
4 . Touch
to make the setting for each
item.
Touch <Exit> to return to the Functions screen.
Local Off: The keyboard and internal sound generator are
separated. No sound will be produced by the keyboard when
● Se le ctin g th e Tra n sm it Ch a n n e l
it is played.
fig.09-
(Tx Ch a n n e l)
MIDI organizes things into “channels,” which are numbered
from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough
for communication to take place. The connected devices must
be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound
will be produced, and no sounds can be selected.
No sound produced
Sound Generator
Local Off
Select the transmit channel (1–16) of the KF-7.
The channel setting is at “1” when the KF-7 is powered up.
If the keyboard has been split into right-hand and left-hand
sections, messages from the left-hand section are fixed at “3.”
● When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you don’t
need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off
messages when their power is switched on. If you first switch
on the KF-7, then the MT-series device, Local Control is
automatically switched off on the KF-7.
The KF-7 receives messages on all channels from 1 through
16.
● Disco n n e ctin g th e In te rn a l
So u n d Ge n e ra to r a n d
Ke y b o a rd (Lo ca l Co n tro l)
When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to
“OFF.” The setting is at “Local Control ON” when the KF-7 is
powered up.
● Se n d in g To n e Ch a n g e Me ssa g e s
(Pro g ra m Ch a n g e / Ba n k Se le ct
MSB/ Ba n k Se le ct LSB)
A Program Change is a message that means “change to the
Tone of the specified number.” The device that receives this
changes to the Tone of the corresponding number.
As illustrated, information describing what has been played
on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two
different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping
or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening,
route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is
When you choose a Program Change message (Program
Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the
MIDI device connected to the KF-7. The MIDI device that
receives the Program Number changes the tone to the
corresponding Program Number.
known as “Local Off.”
fig.09-
Local On
(1)
Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available.
Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones.
With such devices, the Tone is selected through a
combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select
messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the
MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0–127) and the LSB
(Controller 32, with a value of 0–127).
Sequencer
Memory
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Sound
Generator
MIDI
OUT
MIDI
IN
Soft Tru On
(2)
Each note played is sounded twice
* Some MIDI instruments can’t handle Bank Select messages.
Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB
part.
1 5 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
● Se n d in g Re co rd e d
Co n n e ctin g to Au d io
Eq u ip m e n t
Pe rfo rm a n ce Da ta to a MIDI
De vice (Co m p o se r MIDI O u t)
When Composer Out is active, you can send performance
data recorded with the KF-7 to a connected MIDI device or
computer.
When you connect the KF-7 to audio equipment, you can
play the sounds from the KF-7 through the speakers on the
audio equipment or record your performances on a tape
recorder or other recording device.
When you turn on the power, this is set to “OFF” (data is not
sent).
When connecting, please use audio cables (sold separately)
with standard phone plugs.
1 . Press the [Menu] button.
● Co n n e cto rs
2 . Touch <Composer MIDI Out>.
fig.09-
fig.09-04.eps
O u tp u t Ja ck s
You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold
separately) and play the sounds from the KF-7 through the
speakers on the connected equipment, or record your
performances on a tape recorder or other recording device.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
3 . Touch
to set ON or OFF.
In p u t Ja ck s
4 . Touch <Exit> to return to the Menu screen.
You can connect another sound source, such as audio
equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables
(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device
through the speakers on the KF-7.
If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must
use the L (Mono) jack.
● Ma k in g th e Co n n e ctio n s
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Pla y in g So u n d s fro m th e KF-7 Th ro u g h th e
Sp e a k e rs o n Au d io Eq u ip m e n t o r Re co rd in g Yo u r
Pe rfo rm a n ce s o n a Re co rd in g De vice
fig.09-
Input R/L
(Line In, Aux In)
KF-7
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-7 and on
the device you’re about to connect.
1 5 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
2 . Turn off the power to the KF-7 and other connected
Co n n e ctin g a Co m p u te r
equipment.
● Co n n e ct to th e MIDI Co n n e cto rs
You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to
3 . Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
connect the KF-7 to your computer.
4 . Switch on the KF-7.
If the KF-7 is connected to a computer in which sequencer
software such as Roland’s “Visual MT” is installed, a song
you’ve recorded on the KF-7 can be saved on your computer.
5 . Switch on the connected device.
6 . Adjust the volume level on the KF-7 and the connected
Co n n e ctio n e x a m p le s
device.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Recording KF-7 Performances on a Recording Device
7 . Start recording with the connected device.
8 . Play the keyboard.
* In order to make connections to your computer, you must
install “MIDI driver” software on your computer. For details,
refer to the owner’s manual for your MIDI interface.
9 . When the performance ends, stop recording on the
connected equipment.
Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB
connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of
the KF-7.
Pla y in g Au d io Eq u ip m e n t So u n d s Th ro u g h th e
Sp e a k e rs o n th e KF-7
fig.09-
Output R/L
(Line Out)
Set the Computer switch on the KF-7’s rear panel to
“MIDI,” then turn on the power to the KF-7.
fig.comp.e
USB Connector
of your Computer
KF-7
UM-1 etc.
Computer
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
KF-7
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-7 and on
the device you’re about to connect.
2 . Turn off the power to the KF-7 and other connected
equipment.
3 . Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the
connection.
4 . Turn on the connected equipment.
5 . Turn on the KF-7.
6 . Adjust the volume level on the KF-7 and the connected
device.
After use, turn off the power using the following procedure.
1 . Turn the volume all the way down on the KF-7 and on
the device you’re about to connect.
2 . Turn off the KF-7.
3 . Turn off the connected equipment.
1 5 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
Co n n e ctio n Ex a m p le s:
● Co n n e ct to th e Co m p u te r
Co n n e ctio n w ith a n Ap p le Ma cin to sh co m p u te r
Co n n e cto r
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the KF-7 to the modem port (or
printer port) on the Apple Macintosh. Set the Computer
switch to “Mac.”
You can connect a computer on which a sequencing program
such as Roland Visual MT is installed and save songs
recorded on the KF-7 on the computer.
● Co n n e cto rs
When using the Macintosh “Patch Bay” utility, specify 1
fig.09-
MHz as the Interface Type (MIDI Interface Clock).
fig.09-
Apple Macintosh
Modem Port
Co m p u te r Co n n e cto r
You can connect a computer to this connector to exchange
performance data.
Computer cable
(sold separately)
Macintosh IIci
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to make the
connection.
Co n n e ctio n w ith a n IBM PC
The type of cable required will depend on your computer.
Use a computer cable (sold separately) to connect the
Computer connector on the KF-7 to the COM1 or COM2
serial port on the IBM PC. Set the Computer switch to “PC-
Co m p u te r Sw itch
The setting for this switch is made depending on the
computer connected— Mac/ PC-1/ PC-2.
When this switch is set to MIDI, this connector cannot be
used.
2.”
fig.09-
IBM PC/AT
RS-232C
● Ma k in g th e Co n n e ctio n s
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other
devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power
on all devices before making any connections.
Computer cable
(sold separately)
1 . Turn off the KF-7 and the computer.
2 . Using a compatible computer cable (sold separately),
connect the Computer connector on the underside of
the KF-7 with the computer’s serial port.
3 . Set the computer switch on the underside of the KF-7 to
match the type of computer connected.
Please refer to the connection examples below.
* Change the setting of the Computer switch only after the
power to the unit is off.
4 . Turn on the KF-7.
5 . Turn on the computer.
6 . Make the settings for baud rate (transmission speed)
for the computer and the software.
For more information on this procedure, please refer to
the owner’s manual for your computer.
7 . You should also make the settings for the MIDI send
1 5 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch a p te r 9 Co n n e ctin g Ex te rn a l De vice s
MEMO
1 6 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ap p e n d ice s
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
If you think there’s a problem, read this first.
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
The power doesn’t
come on.
Is the power cord connected and plugged in
N o so u n d is h e a rd
The button doesn’t
work.
nected device turned all the way down?
Turn the power off, then back on.
The KF-7 uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text
may not be displayed when the ambient tem-
perature is below freezing.
Nothing appears
on screen.
Has the Balance knob been moved all the way
to the right or left?
Has the volume been set to “0” using the Part
No sound is heard.
Vertical lines ap-
pear in the screen/
Color is “washed
out” at the edges of
the screen
These occur due to the nature of a liquid crys-
tal display, and do not indicate a malfunction.
They can be minimized by adjusting the
Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the
Has the footage been adjusted so that all fre-
quency components aren’t sounded? (p. 15 in
the Quick Start)
The positioning of the touch screen may be-
come displaced if some time has passed since
correct the positioning.
The touch screen
doesn’t respond
correctly.
Have all devices been switched on?
No sound is heard
(when a MIDI in-
strument is con-
nected).
Is the pedal connected correctly?
Make sure the pedal cord is securely connect-
ed to the pedal connector on the rear of the
Does the MIDI channel match the connected
Is the Computer switch on the rear panel set
Depressing a ped-
al has no effect, or
the pedal effect
doesn’t stop.
Has a different function been assigned to the
pedal?
The MIDI connectors and the computer con-
nector cannot be used at the same time.
Confirm that the computer switch is set to
“MIDI” when a MIDI device is connected to
the MIDI connector, and to either “MAC,”
“PC-1,” “PC-2,” when a computer is connect-
You cannot use a
connected MIDI
device and com-
puter simulta-
neously
Normal pedal operation is automatically en-
abled when the One Touch Program [Piano]
926
The volume level
Has Local Control been set to “Off”?
When Local Control is set to Off, no sound is
produced by playing the keyboard.
Could you be using a connection cable that
contains a resistor?
No sound is heard
when the keyboard
is played.
of the instrument
connected to Input
jacks is too low.
Use a connection cable that does not contain a
resistor.
The maximum number of notes that the KF-7
can play simultaneously is 128. Frequent use
of the damper pedal during automatic accom-
paniment or when playing along with a song
on floppy disk may result in performance
data with too many notes, causing some notes
to drop out.
Not all played
notes are sound-
ed.
Th e so u n d is stra n g e
Sounds are heard
twice (doubled)
when the keyboard
is played.
When the KF-7 is connected to an external se-
quencer, set it to the Local OFF mode
set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF.
1 6 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
When listening through headphones:
Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent
piano tones feature an ample high-end compo-
nent, which may make the sound appear to
have metallic reverberation added. Since this
reverberation becomes particularly audible
when supplemented by heavy reverb, you
may be able to diminish the problem by reduc-
ing the amount of reverb applied to the sound.
When listening through speakers:
The tuning or pitch
of the keyboard or
song is off.
Are the settings for the “Temperament” and
Is the setting for the “Master Tune” correct?
A High-pitched
It’s not possible to apply more than one effect
at the same time, so when a performance has
been recorded on multiple tracks or when
playing along with a song as it’s played back,
the desired effect may not be applied.
whine is produced
Effects cannot be
applied to Tones.
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
produced by the KF-7) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland
Service Center.
Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been
A note doesn’t stop
playing
Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may
be sounded continuously.
When listening through speakers:
Playing at loud volumes may cause instru-
ments near the KF-7 to resonate. Resonation
can also occur with fluorescent light tubes,
glass doors, and other objects. In particular,
this problem occurs more easily when the
bass component is increased, and when the
sound is played at higher volumes. Use the
following measures to suppress such reso-
nance.
During automatic accompaniment, changing
the Music Style automatically changes the
Tones and tempo of the upper part of the key-
board to match the new Music Style. If you
want to change only the Music Style without
also altering the tempo and Tone, check out
“Changing Music Styles Without Changing
The bass range
sounds odd, or
there is a vibrating
resonance
The Tone has
changed.
• Place speakers so they are 10–15 cm from
walls and other surfaces.
When a performance made along with a Mu-
sic Files tune has been recorded, recording the
performance to button [1/ Whole] may make
the Tones for buttons [3/ Lower] and [4/ Up-
per] change as well.
• Reduce the volume.
• Move the speakers away from any resonat-
ing objects.
When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance
produced by the KF-7) would be suspect.
Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland
Service Center.
Since the KF-7’s piano sounds faithfully repro-
duce the sense of spaciousness and reverbera-
tion of an actual acoustic piano’s sound, a
certain amount of reverberation is still percep-
tible, even with the reverb effect deactivated.
Reverberation still
audible even with
Reverb turned off
Th e a u to m a tic a cco m p a n im e n t d o e sn ’t p la y
co rre ctly
On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper one
and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to
sound until they decay naturally, regardless
of the damper pedal. There is a difference in
the timbre as well. Roland pianos faithfully
simulate such characteristics of the acoustic
piano. On the KF-7, the range that is unaffect-
ed by the damper pedal will change depend-
ing on the Key Transpose setting.
Touch <Exit> several times to return to the
Can’t select a tone
or Music Style
In the upper range,
the sound changes
abruptly beyond a
certain key
Music Style.
Has the Balance knob been moved all the way
Have you pressed the One Touch Program
Automatic accom-
paniment is not
heard.
[Arranger] button?
If the One Touch Program [Arranger] button
has not been pressed, only the rhythm pattern
Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed?
Has Chord Intelligence been switched off?
Chord Intelligence
can’t be used.
Is the setting for “Piano Style Arranger”
1 6 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tro u b le sh o o tin g
Case
Cause/Remedy
Case
Cause/Remedy
In certain cases, such as when playing Music
Styles on disks, the accompaniment may lag
when excessive amounts of performance data
are used.
If you select a part that does not contain perfor-
mance data, notes will not be displayed in the
Accompaniment
tempo becomes
unstable
The score screen feature is particularly unsuit-
able for the display of difficult, complex musi-
cal works that demand accurate notation.
Score is not indi-
cated properly in
the display.
Song doesn’t play back correctly
Does the screen indicate message, like “OK to
Song doesn’t play
back
The internal songs cannot be played back
while recorded performance data remains in
the KF-7’s memory. Try playing back the song
after deleting the performance data.
In the score screen, some lyrics or notes could
extend beyond the edges of the screen, and
not be displayed.
Is the light for the Track button extinguished?
In certain cases, such as when playing songs
on disks, the song may lag when excessive
amounts of performance data are used.
Song becomes
unstable
Only the sound of a
particular instru-
ment in a song
does not play
If the button light is out, the music on that
track is not heard. Press the track button so
the light is illuminated.
Can’t record
Has one of the track buttons for recording
Have song settings been changed for each Part
Has the setting for “Punch-in Recording”
made?
Some music files may contain settings that
stop play at a point partway through the song.
Pressing the [
(Reset)] button
doesn’t return to
the beginning of
the song.
Press the [
(Reset)] button several times
Can’t record
more to return to the beginning of the tune.
It is not possible to record while the score is
being generated. Once the unit has finished
generating the score (i.e., when the measure
number in the screen is no longer highlight-
ed), try the operation once again.
The fast-forward and reverse buttons are ig-
nored while music files is being read in. Wait
until processing finishes.
The [
and [
(Fwd)]
(Bwd)]
If you select an internal song in which the
tempo changes during the song, and then
record, the tempo will change in the same
way for the performances that are recorded
on the other tracks. The tempo of the metro-
nome will also change in the same way.
If you attempt to play back performance data
that contains more data than the entire capac-
ity of the KF-7’s memory, you may find that
operations other than playback (such as re-
wind or fast forward) become unavailable.
buttons don’t work.
Tempo of recorded
song or metro-
nome is off
There are two types of SMF music files: for-
mat 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF for-
mat 1 data, there will be a slight delay until
playback starts. Refer to the booklet that came
with the music files you’re using to determine
the format type.
If you record additional material without
erasing the previously recorded song, the
song will be recorded at the first-recorded
tempo. Please erase the previously recorded
There is a slight
delay before play-
back of a song on
floppy disk starts.
Any performance that has been recorded is
deleted when the power to the KF-7 is turned
off or a song is selected. A performance can-
not be restored once it’s been deleted. Be sure
to save it on a floppy disk or User Memory be-
fore you turn off the power
With some music files, the lyrics cannot be
displayed correctly.
The recorded per-
formance has dis-
appeared.
If you press a button while the lyrics are being
shown in the display, the lyrics will disap-
pear. To recall them, touch <lyrics> in the Pi-
ano or Basic screen, or press the
Lyrics are not indi-
cated properly in
the display.
[
(Play/ Stop)] button.
In the score screen, some lyrics or notes could
extend beyond the edges of the screen, and
not be displayed.
1 6 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erro r Me ssa g e s
Indica-
tion
Meaning
Indica-
tion
Meaning
To protect the copyright, this music file cannot be
saved as an SMF.
The internal memory capacity of the KF-7 is full.
delete the song or the User style data stored on the
KF-7 memory.
Error 00:
Error 30:
Also, the music file can not be saved. If you want to
save it, please save on the same floppy disk.
You can only read the music file. It can not be saved
on a floppy disk or user memory.
The KF-7 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data
sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the
amount of MIDI data sent to the KF-7.
Error 01:
Error 02:
Error 40:
Error 41:
The protect tab on the floppy disk is set to the Pro-
tect position (p. 6). Change it to the Write position.
Repeat the procedure.
A MIDI cable or computer cable has been discon-
nected. Connect it properly and securely.
This floppy disk cannot store the format or save any
data.
An excessive amount of performance data has been
sent to KF-7 in one time and therefore could not be
recorded. Change the tempo more slowly to record
the performance again.
Error 03:
Error 04:
Error 42:
Error 43
Error 51:
Insert a different disk and repeat the procedure.
The data cannot be saved onto this floppy disk be-
cause the format is different. Use the floppy disk in
the same format.
The Computer switch is set to a wrong position or
the computer is set wrongly. Switch off the KF-7
then set the Computer switch to the correct position
and set the computer correctly. After that, switch on
the KF-7 again.
A new song cannot be written on this song. Select a
different song number or use a different floppy
disk, and repeat the procedure.
Error 05:
Error 10:
There may be a problem with the system. Repeat
the procedure from the beginning. If it is not solved
after you have tried several times, contact the Ro-
land service center.
No floppy disk is connected to the disk drive.
Insert the disk correctly, and repeat the procedure.
There is not sufficient space left on the floppy disk
or User memory for the data to be saved.
Insert a different floppy disk or delete files on user
memory, and repeat the procedure.
Error 11:
Error 12:
The floppy disk inserted into the disk drive can’t be
read. Be sure you’re using Roland SMF Music Files
or other music files compatible with Roland digital
on floppy disk, you need to format the floppy disk
The floppy disk was removed from the disk drive
while reading or writing was in progress. Insert the
floppy disk and repeat the procedure.
Error 13:
Error 14:
This floppy disk or user memory is damaged and
cannot be used. Insert a different disk and repeat
the procedure or format the user memory
This song or music style cannot be read. Please use
a Roland SMF Music Files or Roland Digital Piano
use User Programs that have been saved with the
Error 15:
The KF-7 cannot read the floppy disk or user mem-
ory quickly enough. Press the [
button, then press the [ (Reset)] button and
(Play/ Stop)] button to play the song.
(Play/ Stop)]
Error 16:
Error 17:
[
The selected image data cannot be displayed. You
will need to prepare image data that can be used
1 6 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To n e List
SynthBass101
Jungle Bass
Modular Bass
WireStr Bass
ResoSH Bass
SH101 Bass
Mute PickBs.
Mr.Smooth
Open Hard
Dazed Guitar
Acid Guitar
Hawaiian Gt.
Ukulele
Power Brass
St. Brass ff
AltoSax Soft
English Horn
EX Tp&Shake
BrassSection
Bs Clarinet
Tenor Sax f
Brite Brass
Brass ff
Natural Lead
2600 SubOsc
SquareWave2
Org Bells
[Pia n o ]
[O rg a n ]
Grand Piano1
PianoStrings
Piano Choir
Tremolo Dyno
Jazzy Vib+Gt
Suitcase
Jazz Organ
Full Organ 1
Lower Organ
Theater Org.
Diapason 8'
Bandneon
Oohs Chord
Fantasia
Crystal
Harpvox
Vibraphone
Harpsi.Doubl
Marimba
Perc. Organ
Full Organ 2
Lower Organ2
Church Organ
Rock Organ1
Blues Harp
Pop Organ
L-Organ
CC Solo
Vox Sweep
Brightness
Syn.Square
JP8 Square
FM Lead
OrchestraBrs
Grow Sax
Steel Drums
Honky-Tonk
Stage Rhodes
Ballad Piano
Wurly
Baritone Sax
Alto Sax
Banjo
Koto
EX Trumpet
Tp Shake
FM Lead 2
Mg Lead
Shamisen
Dyno Rhodes
Rock Piano
Honky-tonk 2
Clav.
Trem.Flute
Accordion
Tenor Sax
GS Bari Sax
SuperF.Horns
Fr.Horn Solo
Jump Brass
Soft Brass
DeepSynBrass
Trombone
Trombone 2
Tuba
Dual Sqr&Saw
P5 Saw Lead
Rhythmic Saw
Waspy Synth
JP8 Pulse
Cheese Saw
SynVox
Nason flt 8'
Organ Flute
Jazz Organ2
Jazz Organ3
Jazz Organ4
CheeseOrgan
Full Organ 3
Full Organ 4
Rotary Org.S
Rotary Org.F
Rock Organ2
Pipe Org. Bs
Organ Bass
Metalic Org.
VS Organ
[Strin g s]
Velo Strings
Dolce Strings
SlowStrings2
Tremolo Str
Suspense Str
EX Orchestra
Choir Str
Harpsi.Singl
Harpsichord
UprightPiano
Grand Piano2
Bell Piano
Clear Bells
Soft Crystal
Digi Bells
Piano Oohs
Bright Piano
E. Grand
Piccolo
Nylon Harp
Nylon+Rhodes
Fantasia 2
Soft Pad
Harp Strings
Warm Strings
Violin
Pan Flute
MIDI Piano1
E.Piano 1
GS Pan Flute
Blow Pipe
Bottle Blow
BottleBlow2
Bassoon
Slow Strings
Cello
St.FM EP
P5 Poly
FM+SA EP
Hard FM EP
Harpsi.o
Reso Saw
RAVE Vox
Fat & Perky
Heaven II
St. Harp
DecayStrings
Legato Str
Strings
Organ 1
Recorder
Coupled Hps.
Soft Marimba
EG+Rhodes 1
EG+Rhodes 2
Hard Rhodes
Vibra Bells
Celesta
Organ 2
Trumpet
Digi Church
French Horn
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
Shakuhachi
Brass 1
JP8 Sqr Pad
Sweep Pad 2
Big Panner
Ai-yai-a
Oct Strings
PizzicatoStr
Mellow Pizz.
Bell Strings
Orchestra
OrchestraHit
Warm JP Str
Slow Violin
Contrabass
Timpani
[Gu ita r / Ba ss]
Echo Pan 2
Falling Down
Poly King
EX Ac.Guitar
Flamenco Gtr
Steel Guitar
Jazz Guitar
Requint Gtr
12str Guitar
Nylon+Steel
Nylon Guitar
Mandolin
Brass 2
Glockenspiel
Soft E.Piano
60's E.Piano
E.Piano 2
Ocarina
Octave Stack
Warm Pad
Rising Osc
RandomEnding
Piano 1
[Vo ice ]
Xylophone
Music Box
Balafon
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Slow Str
Strings 2
Boys Choir
Kid’s Choir
Piano 1w
Jazz Scat
Detuned EP 1
Detuned EP 2
Hard E.Piano
Hard Clav.
Soft Clav.
Piano 1d
Gut Guitar
Rich Choir
Piano 2
Acoustic Bs.
A.Bass+Cymbl
JC E.Guitar
DistortionGt
Rock Rhythm
Rock Rhythm2
Overdrive Gt
Power Guitar
Power Gt.2
Muted Dis.Gt
Fingered Bs.
Picked Bs.
JP Saw Str
OB Strings
Euro Hit
Holy Voices
Jz Scat Vib
Opera Voice
Jz Scat Doet
Humming
Piano 2w
Piano 3
Piano 3w
6th Hit
Reso Clav.
Phase Clav.
Pop Vibe.
GS Honkytonk
Honky-tonk 2
GS E.Piano1
GS E.Piano2
60's E.Piano
E.Piano 1v
E.Piano 2v
Detuned EP 1
Detuned EP 2
GS Harpsi
Coupled Hps.
Harpsi.w
Bass Hit
Philly Hit
Dreamy Choir
Doos Voice
Doot Accent
Dat Accent
Bop Accent
Thum Voice
HollowReleas
Choir Oohs
VoiceAah Fem
Choir Aahs
Warm SqrPad
New Age Pad
Sugar Key
Pop Celesta
Tubular-bell
Santur
[Sa x / Bra ss]
Kalimba
Super Tenor
EX Tenor Sax
Sax Section
Romantic Tp
TromboneSoft
AltoSax + Tp
Flute
Air Grand
Piano 1
Fretless Bs.
Slap Bass
Piano 2
Piano 3
Steel Vox
Muted Gt.
Harpsi.o
Muted Gt.2
Mellow Gt.
Soprano Sax
Clarinet
Soft Clav.
Celesta
5th Dist.
LM PureLead
LM Square
JP SuperSaw
MutedTrumpet
Oboe
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Viberaphone
Feedback Gt2
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Flugel Horn
1 6 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To n e List
Vibe.w
Choir
Taisho Koto
Kalimba
Marimba*
Ocarina*
GS Marimba
Marimba
Pop Voice
SynVox
Xylophone*
Tubularbell*
Santur*
Square Wave*
Saw Wave*
Doctor Solo*
SynCalliope*
ChifferLead*
Charang*
Bagpipe
Xylophone
Tubular-bell
Church Bell
Carillon
OrchestraHit
GS Trumpet
Trombone
Trombone 2
Tuba
Fiddle
Shanai
Organ 1*
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
Organ 2*
Pop Organ 1*
Rock Organ2*
ChurchOrg.1*
Reed Organ*
AccordionFr*
Harmonica*
Bandoneon*
Nylon-strGt*
Steel-strGt*
Jazz Guitar*
Clean Gt.*
Muted Gt.*
Funk Gt.*
Santur
Steel Drums
Woodblock
Castanets
Taiko
Solo Vox*
5th SawWave*
Bass & Lead*
Fantasia*
Organ 1
MutedTrumpet
French Horn
Fr.Horn 2
Brass 1
Organ 2
Pop Organ
Detuned Or.1
Detuned Or.2
Church Org.1
Church Org.2
Church Org.3
Full Organ 4
Jazz Organ
Rock Organ 2
Reed Organ
Accordion Fr
Accordion It
GS Harmonica
Bandoneon
GS Nylon Gt.
Nylon Guitar
Nylon Gt.o
Ukulele
Concert BD
Melo. Tom 1
Melo. Tom 2
Synth Drum
808 Tom
Elec Perc.
Reverse Cym.
Gt.FretNoise
Gt.Cut Noise
String Slap
Breath Noise
Fl.Key Click
Seashore
Rain
Warm Pad*
Polysynth*
Space Voice*
Bowed Glass*
Metal Pad*
Halo Pad*
Sweep Pad*
Ice Rain*
Brass 2
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
Synth Brass3
Synth Brass4
AnalogBrass1
AnalogBrass2
GS Sop.Sax
Alto Sax
OverdriveGt*
Dist.Guitar*
Gt.Harmo*
Acoustic Bs*
Fingered Bs*
Picked Bs.*
Fretless Bs*
Slap Bass 1*
Slap Bass 2*
SynthBass 1*
SynthBass 2*
Rubber Bass*
Violin*
Soundtrack*
Crystal*
Tenor Sax
GS Bari Sax
GS Oboe
English Horn
Bassoon
Syn Mallet*
Atmosphere*
Brightness*
Goblin*
Thunder
Echo Drops*
Star Theme*
Sitar*
Clarinet
Wind
Piccolo
Stream
Steel-str.Gt
12-str.Gt
GS Flute
Bubble
Banjo*
Recorder
Bird
Shamisen*
Koto*
Mandolin
GS Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Dog
Jazz Guitar
Hawaiian
Horse-Gallop
Bird 2
Kalimba*
Viola*
Bagpipe*
Clean Gt.
Telephone 1
Telephone 2
DoorCreaking
Door
Cello*
Fiddle*
Chorus Gt.
Muted Gt.
Ocarina
Contrabass*
Tremolo Str*
Pizzicato*
Harp*
Shanai*
Square Wave
Square
Tinkle Bell*
Agogo*
Funk Gt.
Funk Gt.2
Sine Wave
Saw Wave
Saw
Scratch
Steel Drums*
Woodblock*
Taiko*
Overdrive Gt
DistortionGt
Feedback Gt.
Gt.Harmonics
Gt.Feedback
GS Ac.Bass
GS Fing.Bass
Picked Bs
Windchime
Helicopter
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Timpani*
Strings*
Doctor Solo
Syn.Calliope
Chiffer Lead
Charang
SlowStrings*
Syn.Str 1*
Syn.Str 2*
Choir Aahs*
Pop Voice*
SynVox*
Melo.Tom 1*
Synth Drum*
ReverseCym.*
Fret Noise*
BreathNoise*
Seashore*
Bird*
Solo Vox
5th Saw Wave
Bass & Lead
Fantasia
Train
Fretless Bs.
Slap Bass
Slap Bass 2
SynthBass101
Synth Bass 1
Synth Bass 2
Synth Bass 3
Synth Bass 4
Rubber Bass
Violin
Jetplane
Orche.Hit*
Trumpet*
Starship
Telephone 1*
Helicopter*
Applause*
Gun Shot*
Warm Pad
Polysynth
Space Voice
Bowed Glass
Metal Pad
Halo Pad
Burst Noise
Applause
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Trombone*
Tuba*
M.Trumpet*
FrenchHorns*
Brass 1*
*
Tone with a “*”
Heart Beat
Footsteps
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Piano 1*
SynthBrass1*
SynthBrass2*
A.Brass 1*
Soprano Sax*
Alto Sax*
symbol appended to
their name may not
play back
Sweep Pad
Ice Rain
Slow Violin
Viola
Soundtrack
Crystal
satisfactorily on
other GS sound
generating devices.
Cello
Syn Mallet
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
Tenor Sax*
BaritoneSax*
Oboe*
Contrabass
Trem. Str
Piano 2*
PizzicatoStr
GS Harp
Piano 3*
EnglishHorn*
Bassoon*
Echo Drops
Echo Bell
Echo Pan
Star Theme
Sitar
Honky-tonk*
E.Piano 1*
E.Piano 2*
Harpsichord*
Clav.*
Timpani
Clarinet*
GS Strings
Orchestra
Piccolo*
Flute*
GS Sl.Str
Recorder*
Pan Flute*
Bottle Blow*
Shakuhachi*
Whistle*
Syn.Strings1
Syn.Strings2
Syn.Strings3
Choir Aahs
Sitar 2
Celesta*
Banjo
Glocken*
Music Box*
Vibraphone*
Shamisen
Koto
1 6 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m Se t List
*
*
-----: No sound.
instruments of the same number.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion
POP Set
ROCK Set
JAZZ BRUSH Set
VOX DRUM Set (KR-7)
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
R&B Snare
22
Rock Snare
Rock Snare
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Kick
Pop Kick
Pop Side Stick
Pop Sanre s
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare s
Pop Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Pop Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Pop Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Rock Kick
Rock Kick
Rock Side Stick
Rock Sanre s
Rock Snare Ghost
Rock Snare s
Rock Low Tom f
Rock CHH 1
Rock Low Tom
Rock CHH 2
Rock Mid Tom f
Rock OHH
Rock Mid Tom
Rock High Tom f
Rock Crash Cymbal
Rock High Tom
Rock Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha Cowbell
Chinees Cymbal
Vibra-slap 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 3
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Snare Roll
Pop Kick
Pop Kick
Jazz Snare Swing
Jazz Sanre
Pop Snare Swing
Jazz Sanre
Jazz Low Tom f
Pop CHH 1
Jazz Low Tom
Pop CHH 2
Jazz Mid Tom f
Pop OHH
Jazz Mid Tom
Jazz High Tom f
Jazz Crash Cymbal 1
Jazz High Tom
Jazz Ride Cymbal 1
Jazz Chinees Cymbal
Jazz Ride Cymbal 2
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha Cowbell
Jazz Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Rock Snare
Rock Snare
Pop Snare m
Pop Snare Ghost
Pop Snare m
Finger Snap
707 Claps
Hand Clap
Hand Clap2
Hand Clap
Pop Pedal HH
Gospel Hand Clap
Vox Dut
25
27
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Vox Dom
Vox Tuush
Vox Hehho
Vox Doyear
Vox Thu!
Vox That
Vox Aahhh
Vox Tu
Vox Dooh
Vox Ptu
Vox Down
Vox Pa
Vox Bom
C2
37
39
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Pop Mid Tom
Pop High Tom f
Vox Toear
Vox Aahhu
Vox Toya
C3 48
50
49
51
Pop Crash Cymbal 1
Pop High Tom
Pop Ride Cymbal 1
Pop Chinees Cymbal
Pop Ride Bell
Tambourine 2
Splash Cymbal
Cha Cha Cowbell
Pop Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap 2
Pop Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
Vox Thu
52
Vox Cheey
Vox Cymm
Vox Tub
Vox Pruru
Vox Tut
53
54
56
58
55
57
Vox Tyun
Vox Tdum
Vox Afahhhh
High Bongo 2
Low Bongo 2
Mute Conga
High Conga 2
Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
59
C4 60
62
61
63
64
Low Conga 2
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
High Timbale 2
Low Timbale 2
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
65
66
68
70
67
Low Agogo
Shaker 3
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
69
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
Shaker 4
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Cana
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
Falamenco Hi-Timbale
Falamenco Lo-Timbale
Falamenco Tmbl Flam
Shekere 1
89
90
92
94
91
93
Shekere 2
Shekere 2
Shekere 2
Shekere 2
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
Low Bongo Mute
High Bongo Mute
-----
-----
-----
95
96
98
C7
97
99
-----
-----
-----
-----
100
101
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Falamenco HC
Falamenco HC
Bongo Cowbell
-----
Bongo Cowbell
-----
102
104
103
105
1 6 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m Se t List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
STANDARD Set
ROOM Set
POWER Set
ELECTORONIC Set
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
22
25
27
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2’
Kick 1
Side Stick
Std Snr 1
Hand Clap
Std Snr 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1’
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1’
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1’
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick1
Room Kick
Side Stick
Room Snr 1
Hand Clap
Std Snr 1
Room Low Tom 2’
Closed Hi-hat 1’
Room Low Tom 1’
Pedal Hi-hat 1’
Room Mid Tom 2’
Open Hi-hat 1’
Room Mid Tom 1’
Room Hi Tom 2’
Crash Cymbal 1
Room Hi Tom 1’
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
MONDO Kick
Side Stick
Gated SD
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
Elec BD
Side Stick
Elec SD
Hand Clap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
C2
37
39
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 1
Room Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Gated SD
Elec Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Elec Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Elec Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Elec Mid Tom 1
Elec Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Elec Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Reverse Cymbal
Ride Bell
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
55
57
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
1 6 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m Se t List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
JAZZ
GS STANDARD Set
TR-808 Set
DANCE Set
BRUSH Set
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
22
25
27
Slap
Slap
Slap
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
808 Bass Drum 1
808 Rim Shot
808 Snare Drum
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
808 Low Tom 2
808 CHH
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Dance Snr 1
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick 1
808 Bass Drum 2
808 Rim Shot
TR-909 Snr
Hand Clap
Dance Snr 2
808 Low Tom 2
808 CHH [EXC1]
808 Low Tom 1
808 CHH [EXC1]
808 Mid Tom 2
808 OHH [EXC1]
808 Mid Tom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cymbal
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
808 High Conga
808 Mid Conga
808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
Std Kick 1
Side Stick
Snare Drum 1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick 2
Kick 1
Side Stick
Brush Tap
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
C2
37
39
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Brush Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 2
Brush Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 2
Brush Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 2
Brush Mid Tom 1
Brush Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Brush Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
808 Low Tom 1
808 CHH
808 Mid Tom 2
808 OHH [EXC1]
808 Mid Tom 1
808 Hi Tom 2
808 Cymbal
808 Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
808 Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
808 High Conga
808 Mid Conga
808 Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
59
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Cabasa
808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
808 Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
808 Claves
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
1 6 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dru m Se t List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
ORCHESTRA Set
GS ROOM Set
GS BRUSH Set
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
-----
-----
-----
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
22
Bar Chime
Snare Roll
Finger Snap
Close Hi-hat
Pedal Hi-hat
Open Hi-hat
Ride Cymbal
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Concert BD 2
Concert BD 1
Side Stick
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
25
27
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Std Kick 2
Std Kick 1
Side Stick
Snare Drum 1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Room Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Room Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Room Mid Tom 1
Room Hi Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
Room Hi Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
30
32
34
Std Kick 1
Side Stick
Brush Tap
C2
37
39
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Low Tom 2
Closed Hi-hat 1
Low Tom 1
Pedal Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 2
Open Hi-hat 1
Mid Tom 1
High Tom 2
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom 1
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
42
44
46
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
C3 48
50
49
51
52
Timpani f
53
54
56
58
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Concert Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibra-slap
55
57
59
Concert Cymbal 1
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Ride Cymbal 2
High Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute High Conga
Open High Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Agogo
Low Agogo
Cabasa
C4 60
62
61
63
64
65
66
68
70
67
69
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
Maracas
Short Hi Whistle
71
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
C5 72
74
73
75
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro
Long Guiro
Claves
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
76
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
High Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica
Open Cuica
Mute Triangle
Open Triangle
Shaker
77
78
80
82
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
79
81
83
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree
Castanets
C6 84
86
85
87
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
Applause
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Mute Surdo
Open Surdo
-----
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
88
1 7 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SFX Se t List
*
*
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number.
SFX Set 1
SFX Vox Set
21
23
24
26
28
29
31
33
35
36
38
40
41
43
45
47
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
Uno
Dos
Tres
Quatro
One
Two
Three
22
25
27
Four
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Female Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Male Yodel
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Boys Amen
Ole!
30
32
34
C2
-----
-----
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull
Sticks
37
39
[EXC7]
42
44
46
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar sliding Finger
Guitar cutting noise (up)
Guitar cutting noise (down)
String slap of double bass
Fl.Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door
C3 48
50
49
51
52
53
54
56
58
55
57
59
C4 60
62
Scratch
61
63
Wind Chimes
Car-Engine
Car-Stop
Car-Pass
Car-Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Helicopter
Starship
64
65
66
68
70
Ole!
Ole!
Ole!
Ole!
67
69
71
Ole!
Gun Shot
Machine Gun
Lasergun
Explosion
Dog
Ole!
Ole!
Ole!
Ole!
C5 72
74
73
75
76
Ole!
Horse-Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Ole!
Yeah!
Yeah!
Yeah!
Yeah!
Yeah!
Yeah!
77
78
80
82
79
81
Seashore
Stream
83
Bubble
Cat
Bird
BabyLaughing
Boeeeen
Yeah!
Yeah!
Yeah!
Yeah!
C6 84
86
85
87
88
Yeah!
Glass & Glam
Ice Ring
Yeah!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Woo!
Ichi
89
90
92
94
Crack Bottle
Pour Bottle
Car Horn
R.Crossing
SL 1
SL 2
Seal
Fancy Animal
Elephant
Bike
Car Engine 2
Small Club
-----
-----
-----
91
93
95
96
98
C7
97
99
100
101
102
104
103
105
Ni
San
Shi
1 7 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Effe cts List
Display
Description
Display
Description
Applies a light chorus effect with slow
undulations
Applies both overdrive and chorus
effects.
Overdrive
-> Chorus
GS Chorus 1
GS Chorus 2
GS Chorus 3
GS Chorus 4
Applies a light chorus effect with quick
undulations
Applies both overdrive and flanger
effects.
Overdrive
-> Flanger
Applies a deep chorus effect with slow
undulations
Applies both overdrive and delay
effects.
Overdrive -> Delay
Applies a deep chorus effect with quick
undulations
Applies both distortion and chorus
effects.
Distortion
-> Chorus
GS Feedback
Chorus
Applies both distortion and flanger
effects.
Distortion
-> Flanger
A soft sound with a flanger effect
An effect that sounds like a jet plane’s
ascent/ descent
Applies both distortion and delay
effects.
GS Flanger
Distortion -> Delay
GS Short Delay
A short echo effect
Applies
a
resonance effect when the
Sympathetic
Resonance
damper pedal is depressed.
GS Short Delay
(Feedback)
A short echo with many repetitions
Produces a chorus with strong undula-
tions.
Wave Chorus
2 Band Chorus
Space Chorus
Stereo Chorus
Hexa Chorus
Tremolo Chorus
Space D
A stereo chorus.
Applies different chorus effects in the
treble and bass bands.
A multilayer chorus.
A chorus with a tremolo effect.
A clear chorus.
A chorus with extremely small undula-
tions.
Rotary
Adds a rotary-speaker effect.
Delays the sound with a stereo effect.
Chorus -> Flanger
Rhodes Multi
Applies both chorus and flanger effects.
The optimal effect for an electric piano.
Stereo Delay
Adds a wavering effect to the delayed
sound.
Applies an effect that combines com-
pressor, chorus, and delay.
Clean Guitar
Multi 1
Modulation Delay
Triple Tap Delay
A three-way delay.
A four-way delay.
Applies an effect that combines Auto
Wah, Equalizer, chorus, and delay.
Clean Guitar
Multi 2
Quadruple
Tap Delay
Tremolo
Produces cyclical changes in volume.
Phaser
Adds undulations to the sound.
Adds metallic reverberations.
Makes the sonic position of the sound
move to the left or right.
Auto Pan
Stereo Flanger
This effect connect a chorus and a delay
in parallel.
A flanger that varies the pitch in a
stepwise fashion.
Chorus/Delay
Chorus/Flanger
Rotary Multi
Step Flanger
This effect connect
flanger in parallel.
a
chorus and
a
Enhancer
Overdrive
Distortion
Auto Wah
Compressor
Adds modulation to the sound.
Applies soft distortion to the sound.
Applies hard distortion to the sound.
Changes the tone in a cyclical manner.
Suppresses fluctuations in volume.
Applies an effect that combines rotary,
Equalizer, and overdrive.
Applies an effect that combines Ring
Modulator, Equalizer, Pitch Shifter,
Phaser, and Delay.
Keyboard Multi
Cuts off the reverberations before they
fade away completely.
Gate Reverb
Adds two pitch-shifted sounds to the
original sound (two-voice pitch shifter).
2V Pitch Shifter
FB Pitch Shifter
The pitch will change in steps (feedback
pitch shifter).
Applies both enhancer and chorus
effects.
Enhancer
-> Chorus
Applies both enhancer and flanger
effects.
Enhancer
-> Flanger
Enhancer -> Delay
Chorus -> Delay
Flanger -> Delay
Applies both enhancer and delay effects.
Applies both chorus and delay effects.
Applies both flanger and delay effects.
1 7 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mu sic Sty le List
[Po p / Ro ck ]
[Ba lla d /
[O ld ie s/
[Go sp e l/ La tin ]
[Tra d / Kid s]
Aco u stic]
Co u n try ]
AmericanPop1
AmericanPop2
Easy Listen
Shuffle Pop
ShufleFusion
Contemporary
Funky Pop
’70s 1
Rhumba 1
Salsa
Raindrops
Music Hall
Slow Waltz
Kids Shuffle
Kids
Scat Ballad
Piano Pop
Guitar Trio
6/8 Ballad
Slow Pop
Rock'n'Roll1
Oldies 1
BossaNova 3
Gospel
Rock'n'Roll2
Country Gtr.
HonkyTonkin'
Slow Oldies
Slow Dance
Twist
Soft Gospel
Gospel Shout
Mambo 1
Latin Festa
ChaCha 2
Anthem
Kids Dance
Broadway
Stage Waltz
Waltzing
Symph.Ballad
Piano Night
Guitar Pop
Swing Ballad
Pop Ballad
Latin Guitar
Soulful Sax
8BeatBallad1
8BeatBallad2
Soft Ballad
12/8 Ballad
Chapel
’70s 2
Cool Al
Circus
Oldies 2
Asian Pop
Swing Pop
Groovin
Gospel Pop
P.Gospel
Samba 1
Samba 2
BossaNova 1
BossaNova 2
Fast Bossa
Slow Bossa
LatinTrumpet
Mambo 2
Rhumba 2
ChaCha 1
Son
Little Steps
Parade
CountryBalad
OldtimeCntry
D Country
Rock'n'Roll3
Surf'fun
MarchingBand
Polka
Medium Pop
Michael'sPop
OrchestraPop
Light Pop
March
Irish
JB Soul
Tejano
Blues
’70s 8-Beat
British Pop
’60s R&B
Celtic
’50s R&B
Party Waltz
Vienna Waltz
Musette
Crystal
Summer Days
PianoRagtime
Charleston
Bluegrass
Country
Piano Latin
Piano Waltz
ClasiclPolka
PianoClasic1
PianoClasic2
Guitar Bossa
Gtr.Fast Pop
Guitar Waltz
Harp
Fusion
West Coast
Rollin'
Scotland
Japan
Light Fusion
Shuffle Rock
Power Pop
Power Rock
Hard Rock
Heavy Metal
HipHop
Calypso
Ireland
CountryWaltz
Train Beat
Country Song
P.Country
Tango
Festival
Plena
Cinema
Bomba
WesternMovie
Balloon Trip
Black&White
SFX Movie
Western
Merengue
Slow Beguine
Beguine
Strings
P.Pop 1
[Big Ba n d /
Sw in g ]
Techno
Latin Pop
Latin
P.Classic 1
P.Slow Waltz
P.Night
Screen
LooseBigBand
Scat Swing 2
Big Serenade
Fast Swing
Jazzy Choir
Organ Swing
Dixie
Fanfare
SimpleMarch1
SimpleMarch2
Simple Waltz
Kids 4/4
P.Bossa Nova
P.Pop 2
P.Stride
P.Concerto 1
P.Classic 2
P.Ballad 1
P.Ballad 2
P.Swing Pop
P.Waltz
Kids 6/8
Lullaby 4/4
Jazz Waltz
Dixieland
Brush Swing
Jazz Quintet
Big Band Pop
Big Band
P.Concerto 2
P.Concerto 3
P.Swing
Hula
P.Boogie
Hawaiian
P.Slow Swing
P.'50s Rock
P.Latin
Cool Swing
Scat Swing 1
A Cappella
Medium Swing
Slow Swing
Piano Jazz
Swing'in
Foxtrot 1
Foxtrot 2
Boogie
Piano Boogie
PianoShuffle
Stride Piano
1 7 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch o rd List
*
*
● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
● symbol: Chord shown with an “●”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “●” (p. 48).
C
C#
D
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
Cmaj7
C7
C#maj7
C#7
Dmaj7
D7
maj7
Emaj7
E7
Fmaj7
F7
7
Cm
C#m
Dm
m
Em
Fm
Cm7
Cdim
C#m7
C#dim
Dm7
Ddim
m7
dim
Em7
Edim
Fm7
Fdim
Cm7 ( 5 )
C#m7 ( 5 )
C#aug
Dm7 ( 5 )
E
E
E
E
E
E
m7 ( 5 )
Em7 ( 5 )
Fm7 ( 5 )
Caug
Daug
aug
Eaug
Faug
Csus4
C7sus4
C6
C#sus4
C#7sus4
C#6
Dsus4
D7sus4
D6
sus4
7sus4
6
Esus4
E7sus4
E6
Fsus4
F7sus4
F6
Cm6
C#m6
Dm6
m6
Em6
Fm6
1 7 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ch o rd List
*
*
● symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
● symbol: Chord shown with an “●”can be played by pressing just the key marked with the “●” (p. 48).
F#
G
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F#maj7
F#7
Gmaj7
G7
maj7
Amaj7
A7
maj7
Bmaj7
B7
7
7
F#m
Gm
m
Am
m
Bm
F#m7
F#dim
F#m7 ( 5 )
F#aug
F#sus4
Gm7
Gdim
Gm7 ( 5 )
Gaug
Gsus4
m7
Am7
Adim
Am7 ( 5 )
Aaug
Asus4
m7
Bm7
Bdim
Bm7 ( 5 )
Baug
Bsus4
dim
dim
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
m7 ( 5 )
aug
sus4
F#7sus4
F#6
G7sus4
G6
A
A
7sus4
A7sus4
A6
B
B
7sus4
B7sus4
B6
6
6
F#m6
Gm6
A
m6
Am6
B
m6
Bm6
1 7 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In te rn a l So n g List
Fo lk s
Ja zzy
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1994 Roland Corporation
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1992 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1994 Roland Corporation
© 1992 Roland Corporation
© 2002 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1992 Roland Corporation
© 1992 Roland Corporation
© 1992 Roland Corporation
© 1994 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
Annie Laurie
Londonderry Air
AmazingGrace
Ave Maria
Secret Agent
Late Night Chopin
Fly Free
Sun Daze
Clock
Keepers Tale
CountOnBlues
OneDown&Easy
A PreludeTo:
BachsBoppin'
HungarianRag
KismetsSalsa
Matthew
Entertainer
Greensleeves
Hallelujah!
Jingle Bells
Les patineurs, Valse
Little Brown Jug
Marchin' In
Silent Night, Holy Night
Stagecoach
RollOverLudwig
Kid s
EZ Cla ssica l
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
Frog Song
© 1993 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1997 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1994 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
Air sul G
HoneybeeMarch
Jingle Bell
Fantasie-impromptu op.66
Grande valse brillante
Gymnopedie 1
Liebestraume 3
Mondschein
Little Fox
Little Row
LondonBridge
Mary Lamb
OldMacDonald
The Cuckoo
Twinkle
Nocturne 9-2
Petit chien
Prelude28-15
Traumerei
TurkishMarch
Ungarische Tanze V
1 7 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In te rn a l So n g List
Pra ctice
Pra ctice
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
© 2000 Roland Corporation
Beyer 15
The Hunt
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
© 1999 Roland Corporation
Beyer 21
TenderFlower
Shepherdess
Farewell
Beyer 25
Beyer 29
Beyer 34
Consolation
AustrianDance
Ballad
Beyer 38
Beyer 42
Beyer 46
Sighing
Beyer 51
Chatterbox
Restlessness
Ave Maria
Beyer 55
Beyer 60
Beyer 64
Tarantella
Beyer 67
AngelHarmony
Gondola Song
The Return
The Swallow
KnightErrant
Invention 1
Invention 2
Invention 3
Invention 4
Invention 5
Invention 6
Invention 7
Invention 8
Invention 9
Invention 10
Invention 11
Invention 12
Invention 13
Invention 14
Invention 15
Beyer 73
Beyer 78
Beyer 81
Beyer 90
Beyer 93
Beyer 98
Beyer 103
Czerny100- 1
Czerny100-10
Czerny100-20
Czerny100-30
Czerny100-38
Czerny100-43
Czerny100-60
Czerny100-75
Czerny100-86
Czerny100-96
Openness
Arabesque
Pastoral
SmallGathering
Innocence
Progress
Clear Stream
Gracefulness
1 7 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In te rn a l So n g List
Ma ste rp ie ce s
Ma ste rp ie ce s
→
Song files of this genre corresponds to the included
© 1996 Roland Corporation
Standchen
collection of printed music entitled “Roland 60 Classical
Piano Masterpieces.”
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1992 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
Humoreske
Blumenlied
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1997 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1997 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1998 Roland Corporation
© 2001 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1995 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
Sonate No.15
Alpenglockchen
Menuett Gdur (Beethoven)
Venezianisches Gondellied
Alpenabendrote
Farewell to the Piano
Brautchor
Liebestraume 3
Etude op10-3
Je te veux
Valse op64-1
Golliwog'sCakewalk
FantaisieImpromptu
Arabesque 1
Waterloo
WienerMarsch
Blauen Donau
Le Coucou
Auf Flugeln des Gesanges
Mazurka No.5
Menuett Gdur (Bach)
Spinnerlied
Gymnopedie 1
Gavotte
Etude op25-1
Heidenroslein
ClairDeLune
ZigeunerTanz
Etude op10-5
Cinquantaine
Dr.GradusAdParnassum
Grande Valse Brillante
La priere d'une Vierge
Course en Troika
ToTheSpring
Csikos Post
Dolly'sDreaming Awakening
La Violette
Frohlicher Landmann
Sonatine36-1 (Clementi)
Sonatine20-1 (Kuhlau)
SonatineNo.5 (Beethoven)
Valse op64-2
RadetzkyMarsch
Traumerei
981a
MomentsMusicaux 3
Prelude op28-15
HarmoniousBlacksmith
Ungarische Tanze 5
*
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for
purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of
applicable laws.
Turkischer Marsch
(Beethoven)
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
© 1996 Roland Corporation
NocturneNo.2
Fruhlingslied
Praludium
Jagerlied
MenuetAntique
Fur Elise
Turkischer Marsch (Mozart)
1 7 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rh y th m Pa tte rn List
Pa tte rn s Th a t Ca n Be
Se le cte d w ith th e
[Rh y th m ] Bu tto n
Beat
Pattern Name
8-Beat 6
16-Beat 4
16-Beat 5
Rock 3
Rock 4
4/4 Simple
5/4
Pattern Name (Beat) Measures
Shuffle2(4/4)
Brush (4/4)
1
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Triplet(4/4)
4/4
→
March 1(4/4)
March 2(4/4)
Tango 1(4/4)
Tango 2(4/4)
Mambo 1(4/4)
Mambo 2(4/4)
House 1(4/4)
House 2(4/4)
House 3(4/4)
BossaNova(4/4)
Samba 1(4/4)
Samba 2(4/4)
Rhumba (4/4)
Beguine(4/4)
8-Beat4(4/4)
8-Beat5(4/4)
8-Beat6(4/4)
16-Beat4(4/4)
16-Beat5(4/4)
Rock 3 (4/4)
Rock 4 (4/4)
4/4Simple(4/4)
5/4 (5/4)
Beat
Pattern Name
March
5/4
6/4
7/4
3/8
2/2
0/4
Swing
6/4
Stick
7/4
March
3/8
2/4
3/4
Country
Samba
Ballad
March
6/8
Waltz 1
Swing
Waltz 2
6/8 Simple
9/8
Waltz 3
9/8
Country Waltz
Gospel
12/8
12/8
Jazz Waltz
3/4 Simple
8-Beat 1
8-Beat 2
8-Beat 3
16-Beat 1
16-Beat 2
16-Beat 3
Rock 1
Pa tte rn s Th a t Ca n Be
Se le cte d w ith th e Ed it
Fu n ctio n s
→
Pattern Name (Beat) Measures
March (2/2)
2
8
1
2
8
4
4
4
1
2
4
4
1
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
4
1
2
Rock 2
6/4 (6/4)
Swing (2/2)
Swing 1
Swing 2
Shuffle 1
Shuffle 2
Brush
7/4 (7/4)
Stick (0/4)
3/8 (3/8)
March (2/4)
Ballad (6/8)
March (6/8)
Swing (6/8)
6/8Simple(6/8)
9/8 (9/8)
Country(2/4)
Samba (2/4)
Waltz 1(3/4)
Waltz 2(3/4)
Waltz 3(3/4)
CntryWltz (3/4)
Gospel (3/4)
JazzWaltz (3/4)
3/4 Simple (3/4)
8-Beat1 (4/4)
8-Beat2(4/4)
8-Beat3(4/4)
16-Beat1(4/4)
16-Beat2(4/4)
16-Beat3(4/4)
Rock 1 (4/4)
Rock 2 (4/4)
Swing 1(4/4)
Swing 2(4/4)
Shuffle1(4/4)
Triplet
March 1
March 2
Tango 1
Tango 2
Mambo 1
Mambo 2
House 1
House 2
House 3
Bossa Nova
Samba 1
Samba 2
Rhumba
Beguine
8-Beat 4
8-Beat 5
4/4
12/8 (12/8)
CountIn1(4/4)
CountIn2(3/4)
C.InSwing(4/4)
Fill In1(4/4)
Fill In2(4/4)
Fill In3(4/4)
Ending 1(4/4)
Ending 2(4/4)
Ending 3(4/4)
1 7 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pa ra m e te rs Sto re d to In te rn a l Me m o ry
Pa ra m e te rs Sto re d in th e Use r Pro g ra m
Pa ra m e te rs Sto re d in Me m o ry Ba ck u p
→
→
Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-
gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro-
gram screen is set to “Delayed”
Octave Shift
Tone
Parameters
Effects: On/ Off, Type, Depth
Rotary effect (Slow/ Fast),
Organ
One-Touch Piano Settings:
Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion
Lid, Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings),
Resonance (Type, Depth),
Selected
Key Touch,
Right-hand
Tone, Octave Shift,
Tone, Layer
String Resonance (On/ Off, Depth),
Hamper Response (On/ Off, Depth)
Effect (Type, Depth, On/ Off)
Tone,
Left-hand Tone
Metronome: Sound
Count-In: Measures, Sound
Countdown: Sound
Language
System
Bass Tone, Chord Tone
Parameters
Part Balance
Keyboard Parts
Melody
On/ Off, Type
Intelligent
Opening Message
Touch Screen
Split On/ Off, Layer On/ Off,
Lower On/ Off,
Keyboard Mode
Track Assign
Keyboard Transpose, Split Point
Reverb: On/ Off, Type, Depth
Functions assigning to the soft pedal and
sostenuto pedal
Pedal Settings
Performance
Pad Settings
User Function, Phrase
Keyboard settings
(One-Touch Piano/ One-Touch Arranger/ Others)
Reverb
On/ Off, Type, Depth
On/ Off, Echo (Type, Depth),
Vocal Effects
Bend Range
Transformer Type, Harmonist Type,
Transformer/ Harmonist, Music Files Part
MIDI Settings for
User Program
PC Number, Bank Select LSB,
Bank Select MSB, Program Change
Equalizer
On/ Off, Each Sliders level, Master Level
Parameters that switch after the User Program name is
touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User
Program screen is set to “Delayed”
Music Style
Tempo
Part Balance
Accompaniment Part
Accompaniment On/ Off,
Chord Intelligence On/ Off,
Leading Bass On/ Off, Original/ Variation,
Sync Start On/ Off,
Arranger
Settings
<Accomp> setting for
Arranger Configuration,
Style Orchestrator, Division
1 8 0
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mu sic File s Th a t th e KF-7 Ca n Use
W h a t Are Mu sic File s?
● Ab o u t th e KF-7 So u n d
Ge n e ra to r
The KF-7 come equipped with GM 2/ GS sound generators.
Music Files contain information describing the details of a
musical performance, such as “the C3 key on a keyboard was
pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of
force.”By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the
Ge n e ra l MIDI
KF-7, the performance information is sent from the floppy
The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to
disk to the piano, and played faithfully by the piano. This is
provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs,
different than a CD, since the music file does not contain a
and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices.
recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to erase
Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General
certain parts, or to change instruments, tempos and keys
MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the
freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways.
General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI
sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical
performance.
Re g a rd in g Co p y rig h t
Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to
this product for any purpose other than private, personal
enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is
prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be
copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without
the permission of the copyright holder.
Ge n e ra l MIDI 2
The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up
where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced
expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that
were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations,
such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be
handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available
sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound
generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry
either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo.
● Th e KF-7 a llo w s y o u to u se th e
fo llo w in g m u sic file s
● Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano
Digital HP-G/ R, KR and KF Series instrument
In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does
not include the new enhancements, is referred to as “General MIDI
1” as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2.
● Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files
Roland’s original music file is made specifically for practicing the
piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a
complete range of lessons, such as “practicing each hand
separately” or “listening to only the accompaniment.”
GS Fo rm a t
The GS Format is Roland’s set of specifications for standardizing the
performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including
support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly
compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of
sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many
details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as
reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format
can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features
when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General
MIDI, Roland’s GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM
Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that
have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product
supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be
used to play back music data carrying either of these logos.
● SMF Music Files (720KB/ 1.44MB format)
SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file
that was formulated so that files containing music file could be
widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the
listening device. An enormous variety of music is available,
whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for
Karaoke, etc.
*
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the
retailer where you purchased your KF-7.
SMF w ith Ly rics
“SMF with Lyrics” refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that
contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the “SMF with
Lyrics” logo are played back on a compatible device (one
bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display.
XG lite
XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that
defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the
structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1
specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation
format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone
generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play
back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set
of control parameters and effects.
1 8 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MIDI Im p le m e n ta tio n Ch a rt
DIGITAL PIANO
Model KF-7
Date : Oct. 1, 2002
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Function...
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1
1–16
1–16
1–16
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
x
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
* 2
Mode
**************
Note
Number :
15–113
**************
0–127
0–127
True Voice
Note ON
Note OFF
O
x
O
x
Velocity
8n v=64
*1
*1
After
Touch
Key’s
Ch’s
x
x
O
O
Pitch Bend
O
O
0, 32
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank select
Modulation
Portamento time
Data entry
1
O
*1
*1
*1
5
6, 38
7
O
O
O
Volume
10
O
Panpot
*1
*1
11
O
Expression
Hold 1
Control
Change
64
O
65
O
Portamento
Sostenuto
*1
66
O
67
O
Soft
84
O
Portamento control
Effect1 depth
Effect3 depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
*1
91
O (Reverb)
93
O (Chorus)
98, 99
100, 101
O
O
*1
*1
Prog
Change
0–127
**************
O
0–127
: True #
Program number 1–128
System Exclusive
O
O
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
x
x
x
x
x
x
System
Common
System
Real Time
: Clock
: Commands
O
O
O
O
*3
*3
x
x
x
x
O
x
O (120, 126, 127)
: All sound off
O
:
Reset all controllers
Aux
Message
O
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
O (123–125)
O
x
* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1.
* 3 O x is selectable.
Notes
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
1 8 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma in Sp e cifica tio n s
<Keyboard>
Keyboard
88 keys (Progressive hammer action keyboard)
Touch Sensitivity
Keyboard Mode
100 levels
Whole, Split (adjustable split point), Layer, Arranger, Piano Style Arranger, Manual Drums / SFX
<Sound Source> Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite
Max. Polyphony
128 voices
Tones
6 groups 683 variations
(Tone Search by terms and
by letters)
(including 16 drum sets, 2 SFX sets)
Temperament
Stretched Tuning
Master Tuning
Transpose
8 types, selectable tonic
2 types
415.3 Hz–466.2 Hz (adjustable in increments of 0.1 Hz)
Key Transpose (-6–+5 in units of semitone), Playback Transpose (-24–+24 in units of semitone)
Reverb (16 types, 127 levels),
Chorus (8 types, 127 levels),
Effects
Sympathetic Resonance, Rotary and 45 other types, Advanced 3D,
Physical Damper Simulation (Advanced Resonance)
Equalizer
5 bands, Master level
<Arranger>
Music Styles
(Style Search by terms
and by letters)
6 groups 204 styles x 4 types (Style Orchestrator)
Over 130 sets x 4 presets
Music Assistant
(Search by terms and
by letters)
Programmable Music
Styles
Style Converter, Style Composer
24 types
Melody Intelligence
Start/ Stop, Intro/ Ending (2 types for each styles), Sync. Start, Fill In (Variation, Original), Arranger Reset,
Countdown, Count-In, Melody Intelligence, Break, Leading Bass, No Chord, Fade in/ out,
Half Fill In (Variation, Original), Chord Intelligence, Style Orchestrator
Control
<User Programs>
Internal
36
Disk
Max. 99 sets
<Rhythm Partner> Metronome, Rhythm
Tempo
Quarter note = 20–250
Beat
2/ 2, 0/ 4, 2/ 4, 3/ 4, 4/ 4, 5/ 4, 6/ 4, 7/ 4, 3/ 8, 6/ 8, 9/ 8, 12/ 8
Volume
10 levels
Metronome Pattern
Metronome Sound
Rhythm Pattern
<Composer>
Tracks
11 patterns
8 types
59 patterns
5 tracks / 16 tracks
Song
1 song
Note Storage
Resolution
Recording Method
Edit
Approx. 30,000 notes
120 ticks per quarter note
Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In, Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo), Step (Chord Sequencer), Beat Map
Copy, Quantize, Delete, Insert, Erase, Transpose, Part Exchange, Note Edit, PC Edit
Song Select, Reset, Play/ Stop, Rec, Bwd, Fwd, All Song Play, Random Play, Track Select, Count-in,
Countdown, Playback Balance, Marker Set, Repeat, Tempo Mute
Control
1 8 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ma in Sp e cifica tio n s
Touch the Notes, Replay, Select Various Tones, Song Stylist, Session Partner, Wonderland/ Game, Quick Tour,
Audition, Panel Lock
Other Functions
<Disk Drive / Disk Storage> 3.5 inch Micro Floppy Disk
Disk Format
Files
720K bytes (2DD), 1.44M bytes (2HD)
Max. 99 songs, Max. 99 User Styles, Max. 99 User Program Sets
Approx. 120,000 notes (2DD), Approx. 240,000 notes (2HD)
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/ 1), Roland Original Format (i-Format)
Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE
Note Storage
Playable Software
Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0), Roland Original Format (i-Format),
Music Style: MSE
Save
<Internal Memory>
Internal Songs
(Song Search by terms
and by letters)
Over 170 songs
User Memory
<Others>
Rated Power Output
Speakers
Max. 200 songs on Favorites, Max. 99 User Styles, Max. 99 User Program sets
12 W x 2
10cm x 2, 5cm x 2
Display
Bouncing Beat Indicator, Graphical LCD 320 x 240 dot (backlit LCD)
Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff, with note name / lyrics / chords / fingering
English / Germany / French / Spanish
Yes (built-in, MIDI output)
Score
Language
Lyrics
Control
Volume, Brilliance, Volume Balance, Contrast, Mic Volume
One Touch Piano, One Touch Arranger
One Touch Program
Vocal Effects
Connectors
Echo, Voice Transformer, Vocal Keyboard, Harmonist
Output jacks (L/ Mono, R), Input jacks (L/ Mono, R), Mic Input jack, Headphones jack (Stereo),
MIDI In connector, MIDI Out connector, Computer connector,
Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition), Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition, 35 functions assignable),
Sostenuto Pedal (35 functions assignable)
Power Supply
AC adaptor (PSB-3U)
35 W
Power Consumption
Piano (KF-7):
Stand (KSC-18): 1,258 (W) x 390 (D) x 639 (H) mm
Total (KF-7): 1,321 (W) x 421 (D) x 774 (H) mm
(Including the Music Rest): 1,321 (W) x 482 (D) x 946 (H) mm
Piano (KF-7): 30 kg / 66 lbs 3 oz
Stand (KSC-18): 11.5 kg / 25 lbs 6 oz
Total: 41.5 kg / 91 lbs 8 oz
1,321 (W) x 421 (D) x 136 (H) mm
Dimensions
Weights (including the
piano stand)
Quick Start, Owner’s Manual, Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces, Music Rest, Screws for Music Rest,
Keyboard Cover, Pedal (DP-8), AC adaptor (PSB-3U), AC cord
Accessories
962a
*
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
1 8 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
Connecting
Numerics
16-Track Sequencer ..........................................................113
Copying
A
Accompaniment
[Advanced 3D] button .......................................................28
Audio Equipment ............................................................157
Auto Punch-In/ Out .........................................................119
Automatic Accompaniment ...............................................46
Count-In
B
Beat
D
Delete (Song Edit) ............................................................124
Deleting
DRUMS ................................................................................ QS 5
E
Erasing
C
Chord Intelligence .............................................................48
Composer MIDI Out ........................................................157
Computer Connector .......................................................159
Performance on specific tracks .....................................97
Recorded performance .................................................97
“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.
1 8 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
F
L
Factory Setting
Layer Set ............................................................................ QS 14
Fill In To Original ..............................................................46
Footage ............................................................................... QS 15
Format
M
Manual Punch-In/ Out .....................................................119
MIC ....................................................................................... QS 5
Multitrack Recording .......................................................113
[Music Assistant] button ................................................. QS 10
Music Style List ................................................................173
G
GAME .................................................................................. QS 5
H
I
Insert (Song Edit) .............................................................124
Intro/ Ending Type ................................................................... 54
K
Key Panel ............................................................................. QS 3
“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.
1 8 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
Punch-in Recording .........................................................119
N
N.C. (No Chord) ............................................................... QS 13
Note Edit (Song Edit) .......................................................126
O
Q
One Touch Program [Arranger] button .............................47
One Touch Settings ..........................................................142
Organ .................................................................................. QS 14
[Original] button ................................................................57
Quick Tour
R
Along with a Song ........................................................95
With Accompaniment ..................................................93
Rhythm Pattern List .........................................................179
P
Part Exchange (Song Edit) ...............................................126
PC Edit (Song Edit) ..........................................................127
Pedal EX ............................................................................. QS 14
All of the internal songs ...............................................66
Song on floppy disk .....................................................65
“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.
1 8 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
Style Search screen .......................................................52
Transpose screen ..........................................................85
User Program screen ..................................................107
Vocal Effects screen ......................................................33
S
Screens
Search
Chord Sequencer screen .............................................120
Copy User Programs screen .......................................111
Count In settings screen ...............................................80
Countdown settings screen ..........................................56
Delete User Program screen .......................................110
Equalizer screen ...........................................................30
Load User Program screen .........................................110
Program Change Screen .............................................155
Save Song screen ........................................................101
Song Edit screen .........................................................121
Song Search screen .......................................................67
Song Selection screen ...................................................65
Style Composer screen ...............................................131
[Select Various Tones] button ......................................... QS 14
[Session Partner] button .................................................. QS 18
SFX ............................................................................ QS 5, QS 14
Song Information ...............................................................66
SONGS ................................................................................. QS 5
[Song Stylist] button ......................................................... QS 16
Split Set .............................................................................. QS 14
“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.
1 8 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In d e x
T
V
Volume
Tempo [-] [+] buttons .........................................................77
Tone List ..........................................................................165
TONES ................................................................................. QS 5
Touch EX ............................................................................ QS 14
Transpose (Song Edit) ......................................................125
W
Wonderland ......................................................................... QS 5
X
U
Transmitting PC Numbers .........................................112
“QS **” refers to the page number in Quick Start.
1 8 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In fo rm a tio n
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as
shown below.
PAN AMA
ITALY
ISRAEL
SIN GAPO RE
AFRICA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
Halilit P. Greenspoon &
Swee Lee Company
150 Sims Drive,
Sons Ltd.
SINGAPORE 387381
TEL: 6846-3676
8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Office
9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE
LTD
Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980
TEL: 6243-9555
N O RW AY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo
NORWAY
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De
Instrumentos Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion PARAGUAY
TEL: (021) 492-124
JO RDAN
AMMAN Trading Agency
245 Prince Mohammad St.,
Amman 1118, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 464-1200
TEL: 20-2-417-1828
REUN IO N
Maison FO - YAM Marcel
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
TAIW AN
ROLAND TAIWAN
ENTERPRISE CO., LTD.
Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan
N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN,
R.O.C.
TEL: 2273 0074
KUW AIT
Easa Husain Al Yousifi Est.
Abdullah Salem Street,
Safat, KUWAIT
PO LAN D
P. P. H. Brzostowicz
UL. Gibraltarska 4.
PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND
TEL: (022) 679 44 19
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
TEL: 243-6399
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
SO UTH AFRICA
That Other Music Shop
(PTY) Ltd.
11 Melle St., Braamfontein,
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
LEBAN O N
Chahine S.A.L.
Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
PO RTUGAL
THAILAN D
VEN EZUELA
Tecnologias Musica e Audio,
Roland Portugal, S.A.
Cais Das Pedras, 8/ 9-1 Dto
4050-465 PORTO
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 2248821
Musicland Digital C.A.
Av. Francisco de Miranda,
Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel
C2 Local 20 Caracas
TEL: (01) 20-1441
P.O.Box 32918, Braamfontein 2017
Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (011) 403 4105
PORTUGAL
TEL: (022) 608 00 60
Q ATAR
Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio
& Stores)
P.O. Box 62,
Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 285-8586
VIETN AM
Saigon Music
138 Tran Quang Khai St.,
District 1
Ho Chi Minh City
VIETNAM
TEL: (08) 844-4068
Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.
17 Werdmuller Centre,
Main Road, Claremont 7708
SOUTH AFRICA
RO MAN IA
FBS LINES
Piata Libertatii 1,
RO-4200 Gheorghehi
TEL: (095) 169-5043
EURO PE
P.O.BOX 23032, Claremont 7735,
SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 674 4030
AUSTRIA
Roland Austria GES.M.B.H.
Siemensstrasse 4, P.O. Box 74,
A-6063 RUM, AUSTRIA
SAUDI ARABIA
aDawliah Universal
Electronics APL
Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg.,
1st Floor, Alkhobar,
SAUDI ARABIA
RUSSIA
MuTek
3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l
107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (095) 169 5043
AUSTRALIA/
N EW ZEALAN D
TEL: (0512) 26 44 260
ASIA
AUSTRALIA
BELGIUM/ HOLLAND/
LUXEMBO URG
Roland Benelux N. V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
CHIN A
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
SPAIN
Roland Electronics
de España, S. A.
Calle Bolivia 239, 08020
Barcelona, SPAIN
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty., Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099
AUSTRALIA
P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 898 2081
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound
TEL: (93) 308 1000
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
Center
DEN MARK
SW EDEN
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE)
10F. No.18 Anhuaxili
Chaoyang District, Beijing,
CHINA
Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.
Bldg. No. 47, P.O.BOX 13520,
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
N EW ZEALAN D
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880,
DK-2100 Copenhagen
DENMARK
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Danvik Center 28, 2 tr.
S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
TEL: (0)8 702 00 20
Roland Corporation Ltd.
32 Shaddock Street, Mount Eden,
Auckland, NEW ZEALAND
TEL: (09) 3098 715
TEL: 3916 6200
TURKEY
Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat
ve ihracat Ltd Sti
Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler
Pasaji No:74/ 20
TEL: (010) 6426-5050
FRAN CE
Roland France SA
4, Rue Paul Henri SPAAK,
Parc de l'Esplanade, F 77 462 St.
Thibault, Lagny Cedex FRANCE
TEL: 01 600 73 500
CEN TRAL/ LATIN
AMERICA
SW ITZERLAN D
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen,
SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 927-8383
HO N G KO N G
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
Service Division
22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen
Wan, New Territories,
HONG KONG
Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 2499324
ARGEN TIN A
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires
ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
U.A.E.
Zak Electronics & Musical
Instruments Co. L.L.C.
Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,
No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 3360715
FIN LAN D
Roland Scandinavia As,
Filial Finland
Elannontie 5
FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0)9 68 24 020
UKRAIN E
TEL: 2415 0911
TIC-TAC
Mira Str. 19/ 108
IN DIA
P.O. Box 180
295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda
Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
GERMAN Y
Roland Elektronische
Musikinstrumente HmbH.
Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,
GERMANY
UN ITED KIN GDO M
N O RTH AMERICA
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, Swansea
Enterprise Park, SWANSEA
SA7 9FJ,
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
IN DO N ESIA
PT Citra IntiRama
J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150
Jakarta Pusat
INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 6324170
CAN ADA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond
B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
CO STA RICA
JUAN Bansbach
Instrumentos Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
TEL: (040) 52 60090
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
GREECE
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
MIDDLE EAST
KO REA
Roland Canada Music Ltd.
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
CHILE
Comercial Fancy S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 688-9540
(Toronto Office)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6
CANADA
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue,
P.O.Box 247, Manama 304,
State of BAHRAIN
HUN GARY
Roland East Europe Ltd.
Warehouse Area ‘DEPO’ Pf.83
H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511011
TEL: (905) 362 9707
MALAYSIA
BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD
140 & 142, Jalan Bukit Bintang
55100 Kuala Lumpur,MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 2144-3333
TEL: 211 005
U. S. A.
EL SALVADO R
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
CYPRUS
Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.
17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia,
CYPRUS
OMNI MUSIC
IRELAN D
Roland Ireland
Audio House, Belmont Court,
Donnybrook, Dublin 4.
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 2603501
75 Avenida Norte y Final
Alameda Juan Pablo
,
PHILIPPIN ES
Edificio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
TEL: (323) 890 3700
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (022) 66-9426
IRAN
MOCO, INC.
No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave.,
Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad
Tehran, IRAN
MEXICO
TEL: (02) 899 9801
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.
MEXICO
TEL: (021) 285-4169
As of April 1, 2003 (Roland)
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For EU Countries
For the USA
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
For Canada
NOTICE
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
AVIS
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This owner’s manual is printed on recycled paper.
03019723
’03-6-2N
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|